Pioneer DVR-3100, DVR-7000 Operating Instructions Manual

PDF

Document

00 Cover_back_WV.fm 1 ページ２００７年１月２４日　水曜日　午後４時２分

DVR-LX60D

HDD/DVD RECORDER

http://www.pioneer.co.uk

http://www.pioneer.eu

Published by Pioneer Corporation.

PIONEER CORPORATION

4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.

Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270

Printed in UK

K002_B_En

<VRB1459-A>

Discover the benefits of registering your product online at http://www.pioneer.co.uk

(or http://www.pioneer.eu

)

Operating Instructions

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 2 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.

Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly.

After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.

IMPORTANT

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

"dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR

BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS

INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED

SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

D3-4-2-1-1_En-A

WARNING

This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture.

D3-4-2-1-3_A_En

WARNING

Before plugging in for the first time, read the following

section carefully.

The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area where this unit will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V or 120 V) written on the rear panel.

D3-4-2-1-4_A_En

CAUTION

This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1.

To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the rear of the product.

Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.

The following caution label appears on your unit.

Location: inside of the unit

CAUTION

ATTENTION

CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.

RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B QUAND OUVERT. ÉVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU.

ADVARSEL KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING. UNDGÅ UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING.

VRW2262 - A

VARNING KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSÄTTA DIG FÖR STRÅLEN.

VORSICHT BEI GEÖFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERÄTEINNEREN VORHANDEN.

NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZEN!

PRECAUCIÓN CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACIÓN LÁSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICIÓN A LOS RAYOS LÁSER.

VARO!

AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.

This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive

(73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives

(89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and

93/68/EEC).

D3-4-2-1-9a_En

D3-4-2-1-8_B_En

WARNING

To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment.

D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En

If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling.

Private households in the member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one).

For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal.

By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the environment and human health.

K058_A_En

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 3 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Operating Environment

Operating environment temperature and humidity:

+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH

(cooling vents not blocked)

Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light)

D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En

VENTILATION CAUTION

When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and

10 cm at each side).

WARNING

Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed.

D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En

CAUTION

The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.

Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the

AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time

(for example, when on vacation).

D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En

This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes

(such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period.

K041_En

If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal.

The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).

D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En

POWER-CORD CAUTION

Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized service center or your dealer for a replacement.

S002_En

Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel.

IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.

If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.

If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.

IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:

Blue : Neutral Brown : Live

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ;

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.

D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En

DVRLX60D_WV_ENTOC.fm 4 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後２時４５分

01 Before you start

What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Disc/content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . 12

Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . 13

02 Connections

Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Connecting a TV antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Using other types of audio/ video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Connecting an external decoder box (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Connecting an external decoder box (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Connecting to an AV amplifier/ receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . 22

Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

03 Controls and displays

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

04 Getting started

Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . 30

For users receiving digital broadcast services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

05 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

The GUIDE Plus+® system . . . . . . . . . . 37

Using the GUIDE Plus+® system . . . . . 37

Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

GUIDE Plus+® FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

06 Using the digital electronic programme guide

The Digital EPG system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Using the Digital EPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Setting timer programmes . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Other useful EPG functions . . . . . . . . . . 57

07 Recording

About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . 61

Using the built-in A.TV and

D.TV tuners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Setting the picture quality/ recording time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . 64

Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

About timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Simultaneous recording and playback

(Chase Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . 72

DVD-RW Auto Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

08 Playback

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . 80

The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . 82

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 5 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

09 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder

Playing from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . 85

Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . 85

About DV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

10 Editing

Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

11 Copying and backup

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Using disc backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

12 Using the Jukebox

Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . 108

Copying files via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . 111

Editing Jukebox albums . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

13 The PhotoViewer

Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . 113

Changing the display style of the

PhotoViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Reloading files from a disc or

USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Importing files to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Selecting multiple files or folders . . . . . 116

Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . 116

Copying selected files to a

DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

14 The Disc Setup menu

Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

15 The Video Adjust menu

Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

16 The Initial Setup menu

Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . 127

Selecting other languages for language options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Using Software Update

(Digital tuner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

17 Additional information

Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Minimum copying times . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

On-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Front-panel displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . 155

Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

01 Before_You_Start.fm 6 ページ２００７年３月２９日　木曜日　午後９時１９分

Before you start

Chapter 1

Before you start

What’s in the box

Please confirm that the following accessories are in the box when you open it;

• Remote control

• AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2

• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow)

• G-LINK™ cable

• RF antenna cable x 2

• Power cable

• These operating instructions

• Warranty card

• Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to be used for a month or more.

• When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or area.

WARNING

Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries.

D3-4-2-3-3_En

Putting the batteries in the remote control

• Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery compartment following the indications ( , ) inside the compartment.

Important

Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting.

Please observe the following:

• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.

• Don’t use different kinds of batteries together — although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages.

• Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment.

Using the remote control

Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control:

• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit.

• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s remote sensor.

• Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit.

• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote.

• When the batteries run down or you change the batteries, the remote control mode is reset to Recorder 1. See Remote

Control Mode on page 139.

• Use within the operating range in front of the remote control sensor on the front panel, as shown.

7 m

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 7 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Before you start

• You can control this recorder using the remote sensor of another Pioneer component via the CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel connections on page 14 for more information.

Disc/content format playback compatibility

Compatible media

• DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 /

2x to 4x / 2x to 6x

• DVD-R ver. 2.0 /1x / 1x to 4x /

1x to 8x / 1x to 16x, ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x

• DVD+RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x

• DVD+R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x

• DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x / 2x to

3x / 2x to 5x, ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x

• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 8x

• DVD+R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x

Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we recommend using ver. 1.1 discs.

The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders’ limited compatibility with DVD-

RW ver. 1.2 discs.

Model

DVR-7000

DVR-3100/

DVR-5100H

Playable Recordable

Yes * 1,2,3

Yes * 1

* 1

Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.

* 2

Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.

* 3

Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.

Readable file system

This recorder can play DVDs recorded under the following file systems

: ISO 9660*, UDF

1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.00, UDF 2.01.

* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. Romeo and

Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder.

Note

1 • Depending on the recording technique used, even files recorded in compatible file systems may not play correctly.

• MP3/WMA files can be played back when recorded onto a DVD that contains no video files and uses the UDF

1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.01 or ISO 9660 file systems.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 8 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Before you start

HDD/DVD Recording and playback compatibility

This recorder can play and record all widely-used DVD disc types, and additionally provides

HDD functionality. The table below shows some specific compatibility differences between the different disc types.

HDD DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R

DVD

+RW

DVD-

RAM

Marks used in this manual

HDD DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD (Video)

*1 *1 *2

DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM

*13, 16

Logos

Re-recordable/

Erasable

Editing of recorded programmes

Recording of Copyonce protected material

Playback in other players/recorders n/a

Chase play

16:9 and 4:3 programme recording

Bilingual broadcast recording of both audio channels

*10, 11

*12

*11

*12

*6 *7

*11

*6, 15

*14

*4 *4 *4

*12

*8 *9

*11

Notes to table

*1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 122).

*2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording

(page 122).

*3 Erasable, but free space does not increase.

*4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist editing.

*5 Must be compatible with DVD-R(VR) playback.

*6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in some units) (page 71).

*7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW(VR) playback.

*8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback.

*9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback.

*10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video

Mode Off (page 136).

*11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM.

*12 CPRM-compatible discs only.

*13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only

Panasonic and Maxell discs have been tested to work reliably with this recorder. Discs from other makers may become unusable when recorded or edited.

*14 Erasing a title does not increase the available recording time, nor increase the number of recordable titles left.

*15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback.

*16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized before it can be recorded (page 122). In this case, initialization will take about an hour.

is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo

Licensing Corporation.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 9 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Before you start

Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs

DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD+R DL

(Double-Layer) discs contain two recordable layers on a single side, giving about 1.8 times the recording capacity of a conventional single-layer disc. This unit can record to both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs.

• If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video mode) or DVD+R DL discs recorded on this unit on other DVD recorders/players, you must finalize them. (Note that some

DVD recorders/players may not play even finalized DL discs.)

• This logo indicates that the disc is a

DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc:

The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD-Audio content will not play.

For more detailed information on the

DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer.

Other disc compatibility

In addition to DVD, this recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc types

(media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the logos on the disc and/or disc packaging shown below. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD (and DVD), may be in an unplayable format — see below for further compatibility information.

Audio CD CD-R CD-RW

Correct operation has been confirmed for

DL discs:

• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 4x

Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)

• DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 8x

Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)

That’s

JVC

• DVD+R DL 2.4x

Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)

RICOH

• DVD+R DL 2.4x to 8x

Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim)

RICOH

About DualDisc playback

A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which contains DVD content –video, audio, etc. –while the other side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio material.

The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Audio specification and therefore may not play.

It is possible that when loading or ejecting a

DualDisc, the opposite side to that being played will be scratched. Scratched discs may not be playable.

Video CD Super Video CD (Super VCD)

CD-R/-RW compatibility

This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.

• Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/

Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX files

* ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1.

Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder.

• Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-

Audio and Video CD/Super VCD)

• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only

Compressed audio compatibility

• Compatible media: DVD-ROM,

DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM,

CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, USB

• Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio

(WMA)

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 10 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Before you start

• Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or

48 kHz

• Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended)

• Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback:

Yes

• VBR WMA playback: No

• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows

Media Codec 8 (files encoded using

Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless,

Voice and VBR)

• DRM (Digital Rights Management)

file playback: No

• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for the recorder to recognize

MP3 and WMA files – do not use for other file types)

• File structure: Up to 99 folders/999 files

(if these limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these limits are playable)

WMA (Windows Media™ Audio) compatibility

This recorder can playback Windows Media

Audio content.

WMA is an acronym for Windows Media

Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft

Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media Player for

Windows XP, Windows Media Player 9 or

Windows Media Player 10 series.

Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft

Corporation.

This product includes technology owned by

Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft

Licensing, Inc.

DivX video compatibility

DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the DivX

video codec from DivX,

Inc. This recorder can play DivX video files burned on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video files are called “Titles”.

When naming files/titles on a CD-R/-RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabetical order.

• Official DivX

Certified product.

• Plays all versions of DivX

video

(including DivX

6) with standard playback of DivX

media files.

• File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the recorder to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extension are recognized as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefore may not be playable on this recorder.

• File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999 files.

DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.

Note

1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your

PC and/or software.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 11 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Before you start

DivX

VOD content

DivX

In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this recorder, you first need to register the recorder with your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by generating a

DivX VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider.

Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX

VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), the message Rental

Expired is displayed.

If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your recorder and play the content as often as you like, and no message will be displayed.

• File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif

(must be used for the recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use for other file types)

• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders/999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that this on the disc then more can be reloaded)

PC-created disc compatibility

Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be playable in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particular instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information.

Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are not compatible with this recorder.

Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information.

Dolby Digital

Important

• DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM system. This restricts playback of content to specific, registered devices.

• If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not authorized for this recorder, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the content will not play.

• Resetting the recorder (as described in

Resetting the recorder on page 157) will not cause you to lose your registration code.

JPEG file compatibility

• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and

EXIF 2.2* still image files

* File format used by digital still cameras

• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0

• Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels

• Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels

• Progressive JPEG compatible: No

Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

DTS

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 12 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Before you start

DVB

The Digital Video Broadcasting Project, or

DVB for short, is a set of open standards for digital broadcasting, covering terrestrial, cable and satellite broadcasts.

Based around the MPEG-2 coding system, these open standards ensure that compliant systems are able to work together, independent of manufacturer.

DVB is extremely flexible, being able to deliver virtually any kind of digital content to the home, including High Definition and

Standard Definition TV, broadband multimedia content and interactive services.

DVB is a registered trademark of the DVB Project.

About the internal hard disk drive

The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of equipment. When used without the proper care or in the wrong conditions, it is possible that recorded contents may be damaged or lost entirely, in some cases making even normal playback or recording impossible. Please understand that in the event of repair or replacement of the HDD or related components, all your HDD recordings will be lost.

Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to protect against possible

HDD failure.

The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up your important recordings onto DVD discs in order to protect against accidental loss.

Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from HDD failure.

• Do not move the recorder while it is on

(this includes during EPG download when the display shows EPG ).

• Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.

• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.

• Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid places, or in places that may be subject to sudden changes in temperature. Sudden changes in temperature can cause condensation to form inside the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.

• While the recorder is switched on

(including during EPG download when the display shows EPG ), do not unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity off from the breaker switch.

• Do not move the recorder immediately after switching it off. If you need to move the recorder, please follow the steps below:

1 After the message POWER OFF is shown on the front panel display, wait at least two minutes.

2 Unplug from the wall socket.

3 Move the recorder.

• If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be lost.

• The HDD is very delicate. If used over time in an improper manner or in an unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD will fail. Signs of problems include playback unexpectedly freezing and noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture. However, sometimes there will be no warning signs of HDD failure.

If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded material will be possible. In this case it will be necessary to replace the HDD unit.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 13 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Before you start

Optimizing HDD performance

As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD (which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see Optimize HDD on page 122).

Symbols used in this manual

The following icons are provided to help you quickly identify which instructions you need for which kind of disc.

HDD HDD

DVD Any type of DVD disc

(recordable or playback only), finalized or not.

DVD-Video Commercially produced

DVD, finalized Video mode

DVD-R/-RW.

DVD (Video) Video mode DVD-R/-RW

(unfinalized)

DVD (VR) VR mode DVD-R/-RW

DVD+R DVD+R

DVD+RW DVD+RW

DVD-RAM DVD-RAM

CD Audio CD

Video CD Video CD

Super VCD Super VCD

WMA/MP3

DivX

WMA or MP3 files

DivX files

A L L All of the above

02 Connecting _Up_EU.fm 14 ページ２００７年３月３０日　金曜日　午後５時３０分

Connections

Chapter 2

Connections

Rear panel connections

1 2 3 4 5

ANTENNA

AUDIO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

INPUT 3

OUT

Y P

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

6 7

OUTPUT

AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)

AV 1 (RGB) – TV

G-LINK

CONTROL

9 10

1 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT

Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA

IN (RF IN) jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to your TV.

2 INPUT 3

Stereo analog audio, video and S-video inputs for connection to a VCR or other source component.

3 AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector

Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB. See

AV2/L1 In on page 132 for how to set this up.

4 HDMI OUT

HDMI output for high quality digital audio and video.

5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL)

Coaxial digital audio jack for connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS/

MPEG decoder or other equipment with a digital input.

6 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or monitor with a component video input.

7 OUTPUT

Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver.

OUT

ANTENNA(DIGITAL)

5 V 30 mA

DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

HDMI OUT

COAXIAL

AC IN

11 12

8 AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector

Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART connector. The video output is switchable between video,

S-video and RGB. See AV1 Out on page 131 for how to set this up.

9 G-LINK™

Use to connect the supplied G-LINK™ cable to enable GUIDE Plus+® to control an external satellite receiver, etc.

10 CONTROL IN

Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of another Pioneer component with a

CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the

Pioneer mark. Connect the CONTROL

OUT of the other component to the

CONTROL IN of this recorder using a miniplug cord.

11 ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN/OUT

Connect your DTV antenna to the ANTENNA

(DIGITAL) IN jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) OUT jack for connection to your TV.

12 AC IN – Power inlet

02 Connecting _Up_EU.fm 15 ページ２００７年３月２９日　木曜日　午後８時２３分

Connections

Front panel connections

On the front panel there is a flip-down cover that hides more connections.

Left side:

DV IN USB

Antenna wall outlet

ANTENNA

IN (RF IN)

ANTENNA

AUDIO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

INPUT 3

OUT

Y P B P

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

ANTENNA

OUT

OUTPUT

AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)

AV 1 (RGB) – TV

G-LINK IN

CONTROL

ANTENNA

(DIGITAL) IN

OUT

ANTENNA(DIGITAL)

5 V 30 mA

HDMI OUT COAXIAL

Antenna wall outlet or indoor antenna

AC IN

13 14 15

13 DV IN

A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a DV camcorder.

14 USB port (Type B)

USB port for connecting a PictBridgecompatible printer or PC.

15 USB port (Type A)

USB port for connecting a digital camera, keyboard or other USB device.

Right side:

INPUT 2 S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO

16 INPUT 2

Audio/video input (stereo analog audio; composite and S-video), especially suitable for camcorders, game consoles, portable audio, etc.

Connecting a TV antenna

This recorder has separate built-in TV tuners for terrestrial digital and terrestrial analog TV broadcasts.

If you are ready to receive digital broadcasts now, use one of the supplied RF antenna cables connect an antenna (either an antenna wall outlet or indoor antenna) to the

ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN connector. Next, connect the other supplied RF antenna cable to connect an antenna to the

ANTENNA IN (RF IN) connector. Lastly, connect the recorder to your TV from the

ANTENNA OUT connector.

To antenna input

Important

• If there is only one antenna outlet on your wall, use a divider.

• Do not connect a component that can receive analog signals to the ANTENNA

(DIGITAL) OUT .

If your area is not yet served with terrestrial digital services, connect your antenna’s output to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) connector using one of the supplied RF antenna cables. Next, connect the recorder to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT connector.

ANTENNA

IN (RF IN)

ANTENNA

AUDIO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

INPUT 3

OUT

Y P

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

ANTENNA

OUT

OUTPUT

AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)

AV 1 (RGB) – TV

G-LINK IN

CONTROL

Antenna wall outlet

OUT

ANTENNA(DIGITAL)

5 V 30 mA

HDMI OUT COAXIAL

AC IN

To antenna input

We strongly recommend using an outdoor antenna for better broadcast picture quality.

If, however, you want to use an indoor antenna, use one with a signal amplifier rated at 5 V, 30 mA and set Aerial Power to

On in the Initial Setup menu (see page 129).

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 16 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Connections

Easy connections

The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programmes, and play discs. Other types of connections are explained starting on the following page.

Important

• These connections use SCART cables

(not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, and you want to use the supplied audio/video cable, see Using the supplied audio/video cable below.

• The AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or

RGB video, plus stereo analog audio. The

AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video input, as well as stereo analog audio.

See AV1 Out on page 131 and AV2/L1 In on page 132 for how to setup these options.

• Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet.

1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV.

See Connecting a TV antenna on page 15 for details.

• If you want to incorporate a VCR in your setup, connect it before the recorder (i.e., between the antenna wall outlet and the antenna input on the recorder).

2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the SCART AV connector on your TV.

3 Use another SCART cable to connect the

AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your VCR.

Tip

• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows you to record a TV programme from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing on your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is in standby, Power

Save must be set to Off — see Power

Save on page 127).

To antenna input

Antenna/cable TV wall outlet

From antenna output

VCR

To recorder's antenna input

AV2 (INPUT 1/

DECODER)

ANTENNA

AUDIO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

INPUT 3

OUTPUT

OUT

Y PB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)

AV 1 (RGB) – TV

G-LINK IN

CONTROL

AV1 (RGB) - TV

OUT

ANTENNA(DIGITAL)

5 V 30 mA

DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

HDMI OUT COAXIAL

From SCART AV connector

AC IN

Using other types of audio/ video output

If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output jacks, as well as an S-video and component video output.

Using the supplied audio/video cable

To audio input

To SCART AV connector

To video input

AUDIO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

OUTPUT

AUDIO

VIDEO 1

S-VIDEO

INPUT 3

OUTPUT

AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)

OUT

Y PB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

AV 1 (RGB) – TV

G-LINK IN

CONTROL

OUT

ANTENNA(DIGITAL)

5 V 30 mA

DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

HDMI OUT COAXIAL

AC IN

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 17 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Connections

1 Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input on your TV.

Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/ video cable for the video connection.

2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the corresponding audio inputs on your TV.

Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/video cable for the audio connection.

Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound.

Using the S-video or component video output

To component video input

To audio input

AUDIO

OUTPUT

S-VIDEO

OUTPUT

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

ANTENNA

AUDIO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

INPUT 3

OUTPUT

OUT

Y PB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)

AV 1 (RGB) – TV

G-LINK

CONTROL

OUT

ANTENNA(DIGITAL)

5 V 30 mA

DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

HDMI OUT COAXIAL

To video input

AC IN

2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the corresponding audio inputs on your

TV.

You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the yellow video plug disconnected.

Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound.

Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver

If you have a cable box or satellite receiver with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page.

If you are using a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following the instructions on the next page.

Using the setup on this page you can:

• Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver.

• Change channels and set timer recordings on the external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+® system (via the

G-LINK™ cable, and after setting up).

1 Connect the S-video or component video output to a similar input on your

TV.

For an S-video connection, use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO

OUTPUT jack to an S-video input on your TV.

For a component video connection, use a component video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV.

See also Component Video Out on page 131 for how to set up the component video output for use with a progressive scancompatible TV.

Important

• Do not connect this recorder to your TV

‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or other component. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.

• When using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make a timer recording from an external receiver, make sure that the external receiver is switched on.

Note

1 The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video connections.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 18 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Connections

From antenna output

To antenna input

Satellite dish/ antenna/cable TV wall outlet

Position the IR transmitter end of the

G-LINK™ cable so that the IR receiver on your cable/satellite receiver will pick up the control signals (see diagram).

Cable/Satellite receiver

From SCART AV connector

To recorder's antenna input

AV2 (INPUT 1/

DECODER)

ANTENNA

AUDIO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

INPUT 3

OUTPUT

OUT

Y PB

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)

AV 1 (RGB) – TV

G-LINK

CONTROL

OUT

ANTENNA(DIGITAL)

5 V 30 mA

DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

HDMI OUT COAXIAL

AV1 (RGB) - TV

AC IN

S-VIDEO

INPUT 3

OUTPUT

AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)

AV 1 (RGB) – TV

G-LINK

CONTROL

G-LINK cable

See the manual that came with your cable/ satellite receiver if you’re not sure where the

IR receiver is on the front panel.

Alternatively, experiment with the remote control, operating it from very close range until you find the place where the receiver responds.

To SCART AV connector

1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.

See Connecting a TV antenna on page 15 for more on RF antenna connections, including from this recorder to your TV.

2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your TV.

This enables you to watch discs.

3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your cable box/satellite receiver.

This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.

4 Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to the G-LINK™ jack.

This enables you to control the tuner in the external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+® system.

Tip

Save must be set to Off — see Power

Save on page 127).

Connecting an external decoder box (1)

If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on this page. See above for how to connect the G-LINK™ cable.

Important

• Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder.

• Information from the decoder (for example, relating to pay TV services), is only viewable when this recorder is off

(in standby).

• For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/ cable box must also be switched on during recording.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 19 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Connections

• It is not possible to watch one TV programme and record another using this setup.

Antenna/cable TV wall outlet

To antenna input

SCART AV connection

From SCART AV connector

VCR/Satellite receiver

/Cable box

Decoder

AV2 (INPUT 1/

DECODER)

ANTENNA

AUDIO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

INPUT 3

OUTPUT

OUT

Y PB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)

AV 1 (RGB) – TV

G-LINK IN

CONTROL

OUT

ANTENNA(DIGITAL)

5 V 30 mA

DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

HDMI OUT COAXIAL

AV1 (RGB) - TV

AC IN

Connecting an external decoder box (2)

If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page.

Using the setup on this page you can:

• Record scrambled channels received using the recorder’s built-in analog TV tuner.

Important

• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box.

Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/ receiver.

To SCART AV connector

1 Connect the cable from the antenna/ cable TV outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.

2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your decoder to your VCR/ satellite receiver/cable box.

See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed instructions.

3 Use a SCART cable to connect your

VCR/satellite receiver/cable box to the

AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector on this recorder.

4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1

(RGB)-TV AV connector to your TV.

Decoder

From SCART AV connector

AV2 (INPUT 1/

DECODER)

ANTENNA

AUDIO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

INPUT 3

OUTPUT

OUT

Y P B P

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)

AV 1 (RGB) – TV

G-LINK

CONTROL

OUT

ANTENNA(DIGITAL)

5 V 30 mA

HDMI OUT COAXIAL

AV1 (RGB) - TV

To SCART AV connector

AC IN

1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV.

See Connecting a TV antenna on page 15 for details.

Note

1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu:

• Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 132).

• From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual

CH Setting on page 130).

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 20 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Connections

2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your TV.

This enables you to watch discs.

3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your decoder box.

This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.

ANTENNA

AUDIO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

INPUT 3

OUTPUT

OUT

Y P

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)

AV 1 (RGB) – TV

AUDIO/VIDEO

OUTPUT

G-LINK IN

CONTROL

To audio/video input

OUT

ANTENNA(DIGITAL)

5 V 30 mA

HDMI OUT

COAXIAL

DIGITAL

AUDIO OUT

AC IN

To digital input

AV amp/ receiver

From video output

To video input

Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver

To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amplifier/receiver using the digital coaxial output.

In addition to a digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection for compatibility with all discs and sources.

You’ll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amplifier/receiver. Use the ordinary video output (as shown here), or the

S-video output.

Important

• Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amplifier/receiver properly (see

Audio Out on page 133).

• When watching D.TV only linear PCM audio is output from the coaxial digital out jack.

• Do not connect this recorder to your TV

‘through’ your VCR using A/V cables.

Always connect it directly to your TV.

3 and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks on this recorder to an analog audio and video input on your AV amplifier/receiver.

1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV.

See Connecting a TV antenna on page 15 for details.

This enables you to watch and record TV channels.

2 Connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(COAXIAL) jack on this recorder to a coaxial digital input on your AV amplifier/receiver.

This enables you to listen to multichannel surround sound.

Connect the analog AUDIO OUTPUT

Connect the AV amplifier/receiver’s video output to a video input on your TV.

Connecting using HDMI

If you have an HDMI or DVI-equipped

1 monitor or display

, you can connect it to this recorder using an HDMI cable (not supplied).

Note

1 Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.

2 The pixel resolution of this recorder’s HDMI video output is (according to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p). If your display is not compatible with these resolutions the picture may not be correctly reproduced.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 21 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Connections

The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio.

1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the

HDMI OUT connector on this recorder to an HDMI connector on an HDMIcompatible display.

HDMI-compatible display

HDMI

OUT

ANTENNA

AUDIO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

INPUT 3

OUTPUT

OUT

Y P

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)

AV 1 (RGB) – TV

G-LINK IN

CONTROL

OUT

ANTENNA(DIGITAL)

5 V 30 mA

HDMI OUT

COAXIAL

AC IN

• The arrow on the cable connector body should be face down for correct alignment with the connector on the recorder.

When connected to an HDMI component or

HDCP-compatible DVI component, the

HDMI indicator lights.

HDMI setup is generally automatic. There are however settings you can change if you need to. See HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected) on page 138 for more information. Note that the

HDMI settings remain in effect until you change them, or connect a new HDMI component.

Important

• An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and Highbandwidth Digital Content Protection

(HDCP). If you choose to connect to a

DVI connector, you will need a DVI to

HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI to HDCP connection, however, does not support audio. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.

• The HDMI connection is compatible with

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/

20 bit/24 bit 2-channel linear PCM signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and

MPEG audio bitstream.

• If your connected component is only compatible with Linear PCM, the signal is output as Linear PCM (DTS audio is not output).

• If you have connected to a Pioneer plasma display, please select the HDMI setup on the display (refer to the supplied manual for more on this).

About HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia

Interface) supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of Highbandwidth Digital Content Protection

(HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface

(DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays.

HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel surroundsound audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to five gigabits per second (Dual Link), one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition

Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 22 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Connections

Connecting other AV sources

Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder

STANDBY/ON

HDD/DVD

A.TV

D.TV

PLTV DivX COPY

DV IN

USB

AUDIO/VIDEO

OUTPUT

(Rear panel)

COMMON INTERFACE

OPEN/CLOSE

STOP REC

INPUT

SELECT

ONE TOUCH

COPY

A.TV/D.TV

HDMI

INPUT 2 S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO REC

AUDIO/VIDEO

INPUT

(Front panel)

1 2

Connecting a DV camcorder

You can connect a DV camcorder or DVD recorder with DV output to the front panel

DV IN jack.

Important

• This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is not compatible with digital satellite receivers or D-VHS video decks.

STANDBY/ON

HDD/DVD

A.TV

D.TV

PLTV DivX COPY

DV IN USB

COMMON INTERFACE

OPEN/CLOSE

STOP REC

INPUT

SELECT

ONE TOUCH

COPY

A.TV/D.TV

HDMI

INPUT 2 S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO REC

Analog camcorder To audio/video input From audio/video output

VCR

1 Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this recorder.

This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR or camcorder.

• You can use standard video or S-video cables for the video connection.

• Alternatively, you can use the AV2

(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector for audio/video input and output with just one SCART cable.

2 Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder.

This enables you to record tapes from your

VCR or camcorder.

• You can use standard video or S-video cables for the video connection.

• The front panel connections make convenient connections for a camcorder input.

• When connecting an external AV source that only supports monaural sound, only insert the left (white) audio jack to this device. Doing so will allow the same sound track to be recorded to both channels. You must connect to the

INPUT 2 jack on the front panel.

From DV output

DV camcorder

• Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV jack of your DV camcorder to the front panel DV IN jack of this recorder.

Connecting a USB device

Using the USB ports on the front of the recorder you can connect USB devices such as digital cameras, printers, keyboards and

PCs. Please also see the instructions that came with the device you want to connect before using.

STANDBY/ON DV IN

HDD/DVD

A.TV

D.TV

PLTV DivX COPY

USB

COMMON INTERFACE

OPEN/CLOSE

STOP REC

INPUT

SELECT

ONE TOUCH

COPY

A.TV/D.TV

HDMI

INPUT 2 S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO REC

USB

(Type B)

USB

(Type A)

PictBridge-compatible

Printer

USB USB

Keyboard

Digital Camera

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 23 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Connections

Important

• Some USB devices may not work with this recorder.

• When connecting a PC to this unit, make sure the power is turned off on both the

PC and this unit when you connect them via USB.

• We recommend connecting USB devices when this recorder is switched off (in standby).

JPEG file storage devices

• Digital still camera

• Memory card reader (any type of memory card)

• USB memory

The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this recorder may not recognize it.

The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be used to transfer up to a maximum of 4000 files.

WMA/MP3 file storage devices

• Memory card reader (any type of memory card)

• USB memory

• PC (Use Connect PC function)

The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this recorder may not recognize it.

Note that although multi-slot card readers can be used, the recorder will only recognize the first card inserted. To read another card, remove all the cards and insert the card to be read again.

Using a USB hub

• Use a hub compatible with USB 1.1 and/ or 2.0.

• Use an independently powered hub (bus powered hubs may not work reliably).

• In the event of unreliable operation with the hub, we recommend plugging the device directly into the recorder’s USB port.

• Operation may become unreliable if too many devices are connected to the hub.

In this case, try unplugging some devices.

• If the power delivered through a hub is insufficient for the devices connected, communication can become unreliable.

In this case, disconnect one or more devices then perform a USB restart. (See

Restart USB Device on page 140.)

Using a USB printer

• Use a PictBridge-compatible printer.

Using a USB keyboard

• Do not use a PS/2 keyboard connected using a PS/2-USB adapter.

Using a PC

• Note that you can connect a PC to this device via USB to copy WMA and MP3 files. For more information, see Connect

PC on page 109. To use Connect PC with this device, your PC must run either the

Windows XP Home Edition (SP2) or

Windows XP Professional (SP2) operating system and be able to run

Windows Media Player 10. Even if your

PC can run Windows Media Player 10, we cannot guarantee that it will function properly with this device. For more details see the ‘Help’ section of Windows

Media Player 10.

Plugging in

After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder.

• Use the supplied power cable to connect this recorder to a power outlet.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 24 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Controls and displays

Chapter 3

Controls and displays

Front panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

HDD/DVD

STANDBY/ON

A.TV

D.TV

PLTV DivX COPY

DV IN USB

COMMON INTERFACE

OPEN/CLOSE

STOP REC

INPUT

SELECT

ONE TOUCH

COPY

A.TV/D.TV

HDMI

INPUT 2 S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO REC

8 9 10 11 9 12

1 A.TV indicator

Lights when analog TV is selected.

D.TV indicator

Lights when digital TV is selected.

PLTV indicator

Lights during recording started using the Pause Live TV feature.

DivX indicator

Lights during DivX playback.

COPY indicator

Lights when copying is underway.

2 HDD/DVD

Press to switch between HDD and DVD for recording and playback.

3 Disc tray

4 HDD/DVD indicator

Indicator lights blue when the hard disk

(HDD) is selected; orange when the DVD drive is selected.

5 OPEN/CLOSE

Press to open/close the disc tray.

6 HDMI indicator

Lights when this recorder is connected to

HDMI (HDCP) compatible component.

7 Front panel display and IR remote sensor

See Display on page 26 for details.

8 STANDBY/ON

Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.

9 Front panel inputs

See Front panel connections on page 15 for more information on these.

10 COMMON INTERFACE slot

Slot for CA module and smart card used to decode scrambled D.TV channels. See

Common Interface on page 25.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 25 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Controls and displays

Press to start or restart playback.

Press to stop playback.

STOP REC

Press to stop recording.

ONE TOUCH COPY

Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the

HDD.

CH +/–

Use to change channels, skip chapters/ tracks, etc.

INPUT SELECT

Press to change the input used for recording.

A.TV/D.TV

Switches between analog TV antenna input and digital TV antenna input. The

A.TV

and D.TV

indicators show which is selected.

12 REC

Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in 30 minute blocks.

Common Interface

To receive scrambled D.TV channels you will need a CA module and smart card provided by your service provider.

Different CA modules support different encryption systems. This recorder is designed to work with modules that support the DVB standard. Contact your service provider to obtain the right kind of CA module.

Note that neither CA modules nor smart cards are supplied or sold by Pioneer.

Inserting a CA module

The Common Interface card slot is located on the front panel of the recorder.

• Insert the CA module into the card slot as far as it will go.

The Common Interface card slot accepts

Type I and Type II PC Cards (PCMCIA cards).

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 26 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Controls and displays

Display

1 2 3 4 5

L R P

8 7 6

Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused.

Lights when copying.

Lights during recording; blinks when recording is paused.

4 (page 68)

Lights when a timer recording has been set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has been set to record to the HDD but the

HDD is not recordable.)

NTSC

Lights when the video output signal format is NTSC.

(page 132)

Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast are recorded.

(page 131)

Lights when the component video output is set to progressive scan.

VPS/PDC (page 68)

Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording.

5 Recording quality indicators (page 64)

Lights when the recording mode is set to

XP (high quality).

Lights when the recording mode is set to

SP (standard play).

LP/SLP

Lights when the recording mode is set to

LP (long play) or SLP (super-long play).

EP/SEP

Lights when the recording mode is set to

EP (extended play) or SEP (superextended play).

Lights when the recording mode is set to

MN (manual recording level) mode.

6 Character display

7 R/RW

Lights when a recordable DVD-R or DVD-RW disc is loaded.

8 PL (page 89)

Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is in Play List mode.

2 3 (page 139)

Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed, the remote control mode is 1).

Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 27 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Controls and displays

Remote control

STANDBY/ON HDD/DVD

PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT

PLAY

HELP REC STOP REC INFO

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

HOME MENU

GUIDE

CHANNEL

CM BACK

ENTER

–

CHANNEL

A.TV/D.TV

CM SKIP

RETURN/EXIT

PAUSE

LIVE TV

TIMER

REC REC MODE

ONE TOUCH

COPY

AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE INPUT SELECT

ABC DEF MENU

GHI

PQRS

JKL

TUV

MNO

WXYZ

DISPLAY

+ CLEAR CLEAR

TV CONTROL TEXT

INPUT SELECT CHANNEL VOLUME TV/DVD

OPEN

1 STANDBY/ON

Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.

2 PLAY (page 74)

Press to start playback.

PAUSE

Press to pause playback or recording.

STOP (page 74)

Press to stop playback.

PREV NEXT

Press to skip to the previous or next title/ chapter/track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu page.

When GUIDE Plus+® is displayed, use to display the previous/next page.

(page 79)

Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed.

/ /

(page 79)

While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed.

While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction.

When GUIDE Plus+® is displayed, use to display the previous/next day.

3 HELP

Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen.

4 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 78, 89) /

TOP MENU (page 75)

Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized

DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded.

5 /// and ENTER (Smart Jog)

Used to navigate all on-screen displays.

Rotate the Smart Jog to move the cursor up or down. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option.

When using the Smart Jog , turn it lighty to avoid pressing down on the cursor keys.

While watching D.TV press ENTER to display the Channel List screen.

Rotate the Smart Jog when playback is paused to do a frame-by-frame search back/forward.

CM BACK (commercial back)

Turn the Smart Jog counter-clockwise during playback to skip progressively backward through the video playing.

CM SKIP (commercial skip)

Turn the Smart Jog clockwise during playback to skip progressively forward through the video playing.

CHANNEL +/– (page 61)

While stopped, turn the Smart Jog to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 28 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Controls and displays

6 A.TV/D.TV

Press to switch between analog TV antenna input and digital TV antenna input. The A.TV

and D.TV

indicators on the front panel show which is selected.

7 Colour buttons

(RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE)

Use when an EPG screen is displayed or when tuned to a data channel of a digital broadcast. The function of each button will be described on-screen, and changes depending on the screen being displayed.

8 PAUSE LIVE TV (page 66)

Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast.

9 AUDIO (page 62, 63, 82, 83)

Press to change the audio language or channel. (When the recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner audio.)

SUBTITLE (page 82)

Press to display/change the subtitles included in multilingual DVD-Video discs.

While watching D.TV, press to change the D.TV subtitles.

ANGLE (page 83)

Press to switch camera angles on discs with multi-angle scenes.

10 Number buttons, CLEAR, +

Use the number buttons for track/chapter/ title selection; channel selection, and so on.

The same buttons can also be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on.

Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again.

11 TV CONTROL buttons (page 143)

After setting up, use these controls to control your TV.

12 HDD/DVD (page 64)

Press to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for recording and playback.

13 Recording controls (page 64)

REC

Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins.

When the red action button is visible in a

GUIDE Plus+® screen, use for One-

Button-Record.

STOP REC

Press to stop recording.

14 INFO

While watching D.TV, press to display the information banner.

Press to see additional information for the highlighted item in the EPG.

15 GUIDE

Press to display the EPG screen; press again to exit.

16 HOME MENU

Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can navigate all the functions of the recorder.

17 RETURN/EXIT

Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or display.

Also press to exit the MHEG application.

18 TIMER REC (page 38, 68)

Press to set a timer recording.

REC MODE (page 64)

Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture quality).

19 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 100)

Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD.

20 INPUT SELECT (page 70)

Press to change the input to use for recording.

21 MENU (page 75)

Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-

Video, finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or finalized DVD+R/+RW disc is loaded.

When in the GUIDE Plus+® system, use to jump directly to the Menu bar.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 29 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Controls and displays

22 DISPLAY (page 84)

Displays/changes the on-screen information displays.

23 TEXT (page 62, 63)

Press to display Teletext information (in

European countries except the UK) or to start the MHEG application display (UK only) if available during digital broadcasts.

24 TV/DVD

Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get the picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’, in which you get picture and sound from the recorder’s tuner

(or an external input).

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 30 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Getting started

Chapter 4

Getting started

Switching on and setting up

When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you can make several basic settings using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output.

If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly recommend you use the Setup

Navigator before starting to use the recorder.

1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this recorder.

STANDBY/ON

2 Switch on the recorder.

When you switch on for the first time, your

TV should display the Setup Navigator screen (If the Setup Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the

Initial Setup menu; see page 127).

• If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using a fully-wired 21-pin

SCART cable, the recorder will take a few seconds to download country, TV screen size and language information. (Check the manual that came with your TV for compatibility information.)

4 ENTER Start the Setup Navigator.

k Setting t Line System start using your recorder.

er Save

Cancel

Please use the Initial Setup if you want to make more detailed settings.

• If you don’t want to use the Setup

Navigator, press to select Cancel , then press ENTER to exit the Setup

Navigator.

ENTER

5 Select an Aerial Power setting

for the built-in digital tuner.

• On : power is always supplied to the connected aerial, whether the recorder is on or in standby.

• Auto : power is only supplied when this recorder is on.

• Off : power is never supplied to the aerial.

ENTER

6 Select ‘Auto Scan’ to start scanning for D.TV channels.

• Select Do not set if you want to skip

D.TV channel setup (because they have already been set up, for example), then skip to step 8 below.

ENTER

3 Choose a language (then press ENTER).

Initial Setup

Tuner

Video In/ O ut

A udio In

A udio O ut

Language

Re co rding

Playback

Input Line Syst em

Pow er Save

HELPp

ENTER

7 Select your country.

The recorder starts scanning for new channels. After the scan is complete the recorder will let you know how many new channels were found.

• The country setting will apply to both the digital and analog TV tuners.

Note

1 If the recorder does not accept the On or Auto setting (the highlight jumps back to Off ), check that the antenna is properly connected and that it is not shorted, then try making the setting again.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 31 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Getting started

• The clock will also be set automatically here if D.TV channels are found.

• If no new channels were found a message appears asking if you want to scan again. Check the aerial connection before selecting Yes . (If you select No, skip to step 8 below.)

• Downloading channels from your TV

Use the Download from TV option to download all the channels that your TV is tuned to.

Downloading

32/99

Pr 5

Cancel

ENTER

8 Select the analog TV (A.TV)

Auto Channel Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or

‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do not set’.

Line System er Save

P Download from TV

Do not Set

• Select Do not set if you want to skip channel setup (because they have already been set up, for example).

• You can only use the Download from

TV feature if this recorder is connected to your TV using a fully-wired 21-pin

SCART cable via the AV1 (RGB)-TV connector, and if your TV supports this function (check your TV’s instruction manual for more details).

ENTER

9 Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting, or ‘Manual’ to set the clock manually.

If the clock was already set from a D.TV channel in step 6 , this step is skipped.

Line System er Save

P Manual

• Auto clock setting

Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the programme.

This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically.

Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number that broadcasts a time signal, then move the cursor down to

‘Start’ and press ENTER.

•

ENTER

Select your country.

• Auto-tuning channels

The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the channel presets.

Tuning

Cancel

32/99 er Save

Time

– – / – – / – – – –

– – : – –

P r 1

S t a r t

The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After you see that it’s set, select

Next to proceed.

Line System

Date er Save

Time

Clock Set CH

M O N 0 1 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 7

1 1 : 2 0

P r 1

S t a r t

N e x t

If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN/EXIT to go back to the previous screen and select

Manual .

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 32 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Getting started

• Manual clock setting

If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals, you can set the clock manually.

Use the / time zone.

buttons to set your

You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative to GMT.

1/2

Line System

England

London

O f f

Press then use the

buttons to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for summer time, then press ENTER.

Select On if you are currently using summer time.

1/2

Line System

England

London

O n

ENTER

10 Select the EPG (Electronic

Programme Guide) type to use.

• GUIDE Plus+ : Use the Gemstar GUIDE

Plus+ EPG (see also Setting up the

GUIDE Plus+® system on page 33 and

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide on page 37).

• Digital EPG : Use the SI EPG

(programme information broadcast together with digital channels).

• If no channels were found when scanning for digital TV channels then this screen does not appear and the EPG is set according to the country set in step

7 above.

ENTER

11 Select the TV screen type,

‘Wide (16:9)’ or ‘Standard (4:3)’.

Line System er Save Wide (16:9)

P Standard (4:3)

Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then press ENTER to make all the settings.

2/2

MON 01 / 01 / 2007 er Save

P Time

Time Zone

Summer Time

00 : 00

England

London

O n

ENTER

12 Select whether or not your TV is compatible with progressive scan video.

• Use the

buttons to change the value in the highlighted field.

buttons to move from one field to another.

• You can go back to the previous screen in the Setup Navigator by pressing

RETURN/EXIT .

Line System er Save Compatible

Don't Know

• Note that progressive scan video is only output through the AV1 (RGB)-TV connector and the component video outputs.

13 ENTER Press to continue after reading the HDD caution.

In the event of HDD failure, recordings may be lost or normal playback/recording may not be possible.

er Save

As recordings might be lost in case of a HDD

P failure, we recommend to use the HDD only as temporary storage media.

Please copy recordings you want to keep to recordable DVD.

Press ENTER to continue.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 33 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Getting started

ENTER

14 Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit the Setup Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you want to start again.

k Setting er Save

G o B a c k

That completes basic setup using the Setup

Navigator.

• If there are blank channels with no station, you can set these to skip using the manual channel setting. See Manual

CH Setting on page 130.

For users receiving digital broadcast services

This unit can set its internal clock automatically from digital broadcasts.

However, depending on the broadcaster, the clock information received may not be accurate.

Use the following procedure (while the recorder is not recording) to set the clock manually.

HOME MENU

Press HOME MENU.

Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system

This section is only applicable if you chose to use the GUIDE Plus+ system as the EPG type in step 10 of the Setup Navigator above.

The GUIDE Plus+® system is a free, interactive on-screen television programming guide. The system offers programme listings for all major channels, one-touch recording, search by genre, recommendations according to your profile and more.

For the GUIDE Plus+ system to function correctly, it is important that you set the language and country correctly in the Setup

Navigator, and that you have performed a scan for available channels, as these are all used by the GUIDE Plus+ system. If any of these things are not yet set, please run the

Setup Navigator first (see Switching on and setting up on page 30).

TV listings information is received via ‘host channels’. In order to receive the correct TV listings information for your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information. The initial download can take up to 24 hours, but once this is done, all future updates are automatic.

ENTER

2 Select ’Initial Setup’ > ‘Basic’ >

‘Clock Setting’.

3 Highlight the time setting.

4 ENTER Press to display the manual clock setting screen.

5 Set the correct time.

Return to automatic clock setting

• To return to the automatic clock setting, follow the instructions for ‘Replace

Channels’ (page 128).

1 GUIDE menu.

Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup

The language and country settings are already set to whatever you selected in the

Setup Navigator.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 34 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Getting started

ENTER

Highlight ‘Postal Code’.

4 If you are using an external receiver

(such as a satellite receiver) with the supplied G-LINK cable, complete this step, otherwise jump to step 5 below.

3 code.

ENTER

Enter your postal

The system uses your postal code to identify which TV listings data is correct for the area in which you live, so it is important that you enter it correctly.

• See Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver on page 17 for more on using the supplied G-LINK cable.

• Select External Receiver 1 , 2 or 3 , then press ENTER . (If you have just one external receiver, use External Receiver

1 . You can add further receivers in 2 and

3 if you need to.)

After pressing ENTER :

• Select your reception method

( Terrestrial , Cable or Satellite ).

• Select your provider (if applicable).

• Select the brand of your external receiver.

• Identify which input your external receiver is connected to.

After completing these steps the recorder will try and communicate with your external receiver and change the channel via the G-

LINK cable. If the channel was successfully changed, select Yes to confirm.

If the channel did not change, select No . The

GUIDE Plus+ system will try other codes assigned to your external receiver. If none of the codes changes the channel successfully, tune your external receiver to the host channel for your country (refer to step 5 below) and leave it on overnight. The

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 35 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Getting started

04 recorder needs to be in standby; it will wake up automatically and download new codes from the host channel. The next day, try this setup process again:

• Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE

Plus+ screen.

• Press use

to highlight the Menu bar, then

to reach the Setup area and select Setup.

• Continue setting up from the start of this step again.

If your external receiver still doesn’t respond to the G-LINK controller, please call customer support and report the brand and model of your external receiver.

See also GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting on page 48.

5 Identify the host channel for your country.

The TV listings information available in the

GUIDE Plus+ system is distributed throughout Europe by selected broadcasters called host channels . It is important that the host (analog) channel for your country is correctly identified in order to receive listings information (EPG download).

Follow A , B or C below depending on your setup:

A If you are not using an external receiver, this recorder will automatically scan all channels for the host channel:

• Leave the recorder in standby overnight

(do not leave it switched on).

B If you are using an external receiver, you need to identify the host channel from the table below:

Country/

Region

Austria

Host channels

Eurosport

Comments

Belgium

France

Germany

Italy

RTL-TVI

Canal+

Eurosport

MTV

Analog only

Netherlands Eurosport

Spain Tele 5 Analog only

Switzerland Eurosport

UK ITV, Eurosport ITV is analog only. Use

Eurosport if you are a

SKY subscriber and you no longer have an analog terrestrial antenna.

• Tune your external receiver to the appropriate host channel and leave the receiver on and the recorder in standby overnight.

C If you use both an external receiver and this recorder as sources, follow the instructions above for setting up without an external receiver. Only if this is unsuccessful try the external receiver method.

About EPG download

• EPG data can only be received when the recorder is in standby. (When not using the recorder, therefore, please switch it into standby.) If you’re using an external receiver, leave this on when EPG data is downloading.

• If you cannot receive any of the host channels (see the above table) then you won’t be able to use the GUIDE Plus+ system. In this case do not set the postal code (or set Country to Other ) in the

GUIDE Plus+ setup screen. (When

GUIDE Plus+ service starts in your area, set the postal code again.)

If digital broadcasts start in your area, please set the EPG Type Select setting in the Initial Setup menu to Digital EPG .

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 36 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Getting started

• Even if you can’t use the EPG functions where you live, you can still set VIDEO

Plus+ recordings and manual recordings — see Setting a manual recording on page 45.

• The front panel display shows EPG when receiving data. If you power on the recorder during an EPG download, the download is cancelled.

• EPG data may be received several times a day. All updates are automatic.

• When downloading EPG data, the recorder may sound as though it is on.

This is normal.

Checking the downloaded data the following day

GUIDE

Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.

• For any channel that you turn ON , the

GUIDE Plus+ system will need to know how it is received (the source) and on which programme number. The source may be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or an external receiver. The programme number is the number on which the channel can be found on its receiving device/source. The entry in the Editor screen must match this number for correct recording of that channel.

• The above is especially important for the

‘host channel’. Please make sure that the host channel is always switched ON .

2 Change the programme numbers as you like.

Changing the programme numbers allows you to decide the order in which the channels change when stepping through them sequentially. You can do this to group certain channels together, for example.

You should see a grid filled with channel logos and TV listings information. Use the

buttons to review the list. If you notice that there are channels missing, or that there are channels in the list that you don’t get, go to the Editor screen:

• Press repeatedly until the Menu bar is highlighted.

• Press until Editor is highlighted. The main area of the screen now shows a list of channels. Those that are turned ON are displayed in the grid; those that are

OFF are hidden. Use the

/// buttons to move down the list and turn channels ON or OFF as necessary.

Name

BBC1

BBC2

ITV

CH4

CH5

BBC3

ITV2

UKGOL

On/Off Source

On D. TV

Off

D. TV

Ext. Rec. 1

D. TV

D. TV

D. TV

Prog. No.

001

002

003

004

005

007

006

014

017

3 When you’re done, press the BLUE

Action button (Home) to get back to the

GUIDE Plus+ home screen.

• You can find detailed information on using the GUIDE Plus+ system in the following chapter.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 37 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

Chapter 5

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type

Select setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup menu) is set to GUIDE Plus+ .

The GUIDE Plus+ system

The GUIDE Plus+® system* is a free, interactive on-screen television programming guide.

The system provides programme listings for all major channels, one-touch recording, searching by genre, recommendations according to your profile and more. The GUIDE Plus+ system is a convenient way to find out what’s on right now or during the coming week, by channel or by genre. The GUIDE Plus+ system also allows you to automatically set your viewing and recording selections quickly and easily.

In order to receive the correct TV listings information for your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system and

‘download’ the TV listings information. If you haven’t already done this, please turn to

Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system on page 33 before proceeding.

* GUIDE Plus+, S

HOW

IEW

, VIDEO Plus+,

G-LINK are (1) registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3) subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide

International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates.

Legal Notice

GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/

OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY

LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAMME

SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE

GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL

GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/

OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY

AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS

OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION

WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY

INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES

RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.

Using the GUIDE Plus+ system

All the various features and areas are colourcoded for ease of navigation. All screens

(with the exception of some setup screens) have the following common elements:

1 Video window – Allows you to continue watching the current programme while using the GUIDE Plus+ system.

2 Information panels – Display programme promotions or instructions on the GUIDE Plus+ system.

3 Action bar – Colour-coded Action buttons change function depending on the area.

4 Information box – Shows short programme descriptions or help menus.

Note

1 The GUIDE Plus+ system can’t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System (see also Input Line

System on page 127).

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 38 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

5 Menu bar – Gives access to the various areas of the GUIDE Plus+ system.

6 Grid – Shows TV listings information for the next seven days by channel and time.

GUIDE Plus+ navigation

The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons you’ll use to navigate the

GUIDE Plus+ system.

Key

REC

What it does

Press to set or cancel One

Button Recording.

GUIDE Press to display the GUIDE

Plus+ screen (also use to exit).

///

RED , GREEN ,

YELLOW , BLUE

Action buttons that change functionality depending on the Area.

MENU

Use to navigate screens

(highlight an item).

TIMER REC

Press to jump directly to the

Menu bar.

Press to go directly to the

Schedule area.

INFO

ENTER

Press to display extended information for the current programme.

Press to confirm a selection or to leave the GUIDE

Plus+ screen.

Use for numeric entry.

Number buttons

PREV/

NEXT

Press to select the previous/ next page of information (in the grid, for example).

Press to select the previous/ next day.

One-Button-Record

The RED Action button (Record) is visible anytime you can highlight a programme title, including from the Grid, after a search, or in your recommendations in the My TV area.

The programme name, date, channel, recording start and end times are all set automatically when you set a timer recording using One-Button-Record.

If you need to, you can edit the settings at any time before the recording is due to start

(see Editing a scheduled recording on page 43).

1 Highlight a programme title.

2 Press the RED Action button (Record).

The programme is now set for recording.

When the programme is due to start, the recorder will switch to the correct channel and start recording

• You can also use the the recording.

REC button to set

• You can review the shows you have set to record in the Schedule Area (see also

The Schedule Area on page 42).

Note

1 Recording times set using the GUIDE Plus+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that may occur in the programme broadcast schedules.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 39 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

Lock/Unlock video window

When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system, the channel you were watching remains visible in the video window. The date stamp above the window lets you know the channel, date and time.

The default setting for this window is

‘locked’, as indicated by a closed padlock icon above the video window. When locked, the video window always shows the channel you were previously watching as you move up and down through the listings grid.

If you prefer, you can unlock the video window so that as you highlight different channels in the listings grid, that channel is shown in the video window.

1 Highlight a channel logo.

Channel logos are displayed to the left of programme titles.

2 Press the RED Action button (Unlock).

The padlock icon above the video window becomes unlocked. It remains unlocked for the remainder of your current TV viewing session.

If you want to lock the video window again, follow the same procedure. The RED Action button will now act as Lock.

Channel mosaic screen

You can switch the display style of channels in the Grid Area, Schedule Area or My TV

Area from a list to a mosaic of channel icons by pressing the YELLOW Action button.

Select the channel icon you want using the cursor buttons, then press ENTER to return to the previous screen on that channel.

Areas

The GUIDE Plus+® system consists of seven Areas . All Areas can be accessed from the Menu bar.

• Grid – The GUIDE Plus+ system Home

Area. Displays TV listings information for the next seven days by time and channel.

• Search – Search for TV programmes by category (e.g., Sport), subcategory (e.g.,

Football) or keyword.

• My TV – Set up a profile and receive recommendations according to your preferences.

• Schedule – Show all scheduled recordings.

• Info – Area for additional information, such as weather (not available in all regions).

• Editor – Change channel settings.

• Setup – Setup the GUIDE Plus+® system.

The Grid Area

The Grid is the main TV listings screen of the

GUIDE Plus+ system and is the first screen that you see when you press GUIDE . You can see TV listings for the next seven days, starting with the current day.

When you highlight a programme in the

Grid, you can see information about it in the

Information Box, including title, synopsis, channel, source, time and length. If there is an i symbol in the Information Box, it means that there is an extended synopsis available.

Press the INFO button to see it.

In some countries, you can also see a rating for a particular programme (mostly movies).

These ratings are provided by local partners, such as TV magazines.

From the Grid Area you can:

• View and scroll through programme listings

• Read programme synopses

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 40 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing

• Set a programme to record

• Lock or unlock the video window

• Access Information panels

Browsing the Grid

Use the following remote buttons to browse the grid:

///

(cursor buttons) – Navigate the

Grid

PREV / NEXT – Previous / next page

– Previous / next day

BLUE Action button – Return to the current time/date in the Grid

ENTER – Press on the current selection to exit the GUIDE Plus+ system and start watching the programme

The Search Area

From the Search Area you can:

• Search by category

• Search by subcategory

• Search by keyword

• Read programme synopses

• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing

• Set a programme to record

• Access Information panels

Searching

You can search for programmes by category, subcategory or by keyword (My Choice).

Categories for searching include Movies

(purple), Sport (green), Children (blue) and

Others (teal). In some countries there is a further subcategory available called ‘Tip of the Day’. These are programmes recommended by a local partner, such as a

TV magazine.

1 bar.

Select ‘Search’ from the Menu

2 Select a category and a subcategory.

• If you choose All as the subcategory, all programmes in the category you selected will show up in the search results.

3 ENTER Start the search.

The search results are shown sorted by time and date.

• If no search results are displayed, it means there are no programmes for the current day that match your search criteria.

Note

1 If you’re using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds while it tunes to the channel. This is normal.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 41 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

Using My Choice keywords for a search

In addition to the standard categories, you can also set your own keywords.

1 Access My Choice.

2 Press the YELLOW Action button to add a keyword.

ENTER

3 the menu.

Enter a keyword to appear in

My TV Area

The My TV Area allows you to set up a personal profile. You can define a profile by channels, themes and/or keywords. As soon as a personal profile has been set, the

GUIDE Plus+ system continuously scans the TV listings for the next seven days.

Whenever you access the My TV Area, a list of programmes matching your profile appears.

From the My TV Area you can:

• Set up a profile by channel, theme and/ or keyword

• Edit and delete profiles

• Read programme synopses

• Tune to a programme that’s currently showing

• Set a programme to record

• Access Information panels

Setting up a profile

You can set up a profile with any combination of up to 16 channels, four categories and 16 keywords.

1 Select ‘My TV’ from the Menu bar.

2 Press the YELLOW Action button to set a profile.

When you’re finished, press the GREEN

Action button to exit and continue.

4 ENTER Start the keyword search.

• You can delete or edit keywords using the RED and GREEN Action buttons.

• When you have set more than two keywords, an All subcategory automatically appears which allows you to search for all your keywords.

Channels is now highlighted.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 42 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

3 To add a channel to your profile, press the YELLOW Action button.

5 To add a keyword to your profile, highlight ‘Keywords’ and press the

YELLOW Action button.

Select a channel from the mosaic of channel icons and press ENTER . Repeat this step to add up to 16 channels.

4 To add a category to your profile, highlight ‘Categories’ and press the

YELLOW Action button.

Select a category from the Search Area categories and press ENTER . Repeat this step to add up to four categories.

Use the

///

buttons followed by

ENTER to select characters from the onscreen keyboard. When you’re finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and continue.

6 Press ENTER to activate your profile.

• You can add up to 16 keywords by repeating step 5 .

• You can edit or delete your profile using the RED and GREEN Action buttons.

The Schedule Area

The Schedule Area is where you can set, see, edit and delete scheduled (timer) recordings.

From the Schedule Area you can:

• Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording

• Set, edit or delete a VIDEO Plus+ recording

• Set, edit or delete a manual recording

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 43 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

Editing a scheduled recording

You can edit any parameter in a scheduled recording, or delete it if you no longer require it

1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.

4 Enter a name for the scheduled recording.

• If you only want to edit the recording quality, frequency, destination, timing or genre settings, skip to step 5 below.

2 Press the GREEN Action button (Edit).

3 Use the cursor and number buttons to edit the recording date, start time, end time and channel.

Use the

///

buttons followed by

ENTER to select characters from the onscreen keyboard.

After entering the whole name, press the

GREEN Action button to continue.

5 Highlight the right recording tile.

6 Press the RED Action button (Quality) to change the recording quality.

Use the

buttons or the number buttons to edit.

Press the GREEN Action button to go to continue, or the RED Action button to go back.

Select from AUTO

, XP , SP , LP , EP , SLP , SEP or a manual recording mode (see Manual

Recording on page 135 and Manual recording modes on page 145).

Note

1 See About timer recordings on page 68 for more information about scheduled recordings.

2 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to

HDD.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 44 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

7 Press the GREEN Action button

(Frequency) to change the recording frequency.

• Auto Replace Recording is only available as an option with regular daily or weekly recordings.

9 Press to access the extended recording options.

Select from the various options for one-time, daily and weekly recordings.

8 Press YELLOW Action button

(Destination) to select the recording destination.

• If you want to record to a particular HDD genre, use the YELLOW Action button

( Genre ) to select one.

• Use the GREEN Action button ( Timing ) to add extra time to the end of the recording ( +0 , +10 , +20 , +30 or VPS/

PDC

( V–P )).

• Press to display the standard recording options again.

Select from DVD , HDD or HDDr (Auto

Replace Recording)

Note

1 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 135) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality ( MN4 for DVD+R/+RW) then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead.

• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.

• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programmes will be erased.

2 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby.

• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.

• Up to eight timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.

• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO .

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 45 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

Deleting a scheduled recording

1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.

3 Use the number buttons to enter a

PlusCode programming number.

Please enter the PlusCode programming number and press

ENTER to confirm.

2 Press the RED Action button (Delete).

The scheduled event is deleted.

Setting a VIDEO Plus+® recording

1 Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.

• If you live in an area not yet covered by the GUIDE Plus+ system you may also have to input a channel number. Follow the on-screen display to do this.

4 Press ENTER to confirm.

Setting a manual recording

1 Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar.

2 Press the RED Action button (VIDEO

Plus+).

2 Press the GREEN Action button

(Manual).

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 46 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

3 Use the number and

/// buttons to enter the recording date, then press the GREEN Action button (Next).

4 In the same way, enter the recording start time, followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to confirm.

5 Enter the recording end time in the same way, followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to confirm.

6 Use the number buttons to enter a channel number, then press the GREEN

Action button (Next) to confirm.

D.TV 001

The Info Area

This area is reserved for additional information such as news, weather reports, stock quotes, and so on, and varies by region. (Note that this feature is not available in all countries/regions.)

The Editor Area

The Editor Area is the central location for you to manage your channels. Any changes you make here will affect what is displayed in the

Grid Area. The Editor Area is mainly used when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to make any manual changes as necessary.

You can also use the Editor Area if new channels become available in your area, or if you change from cable to satellite, say, or move house.

From the Editor Area you can:

• Display/hide channels in the grid (switch the channel on/off)

• Select a channel source ( A.TV

, D.TV

Ext. Rec. 1 , Ext. Rec. 2 , etc.)

• Enter a channel programme number

Switching a channel on/off

You can choose whether or not to display a channel in the Grid Area by switching the channel on or off in the Editor Area.

1 Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.

Alternatively, you can press the YELLOW

Action button (

Mosaic ) and use the

buttons to select a channel from the mosaic, followed by ENTER .

Name

BBC1

BBC2

ITV

CH4

CH5

BBC3

ITV2

UKGOL

On/Off Source

On D. TV

Off

D. TV

Ext. Rec. 1

D. TV

D. TV

D. TV

Prog. No.

001

002

003

004

005

007

006

014

017

2 Highlight the left channel tile of the channel you want to switch on or off.

3 Press the RED Action button to switch the channel on or off.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 47 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

Changing the source and programme number

1 Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar.

The Setup Area

The Setup Area is where you can set up the

GUIDE Plus+ system for your particular region, TV reception conditions, and so on.

Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+ setup

1 Select ‘Setup’ from the Menu bar.

Name

BBC1

BBC2

ITV

CH4

CH5

BBC3

ITV2

UKGOL

On/Off Source

On D. TV

Off

D. TV

Ext. Rec. 1

D. TV

D. TV

D. TV

Prog. No.

001

002

003

004

005

007

006

014

017

2 Highlight the right channel tile of the channel you want to make a change to.

3 Press the RED Action button to change the channel source, or the GREEN

Action button to enter a programme number.

Each press of the RED Action button changes the channel source ( A.TV

, D.TV

Ext. Rec. 1 , etc.). To set a programme number, use the number buttons to enter a programme number then press ENTER

(When set to A.TV

or D.TV

, make sure that the programme number matches the preset number of this recorder for what you want to record).

Press ENTER to access the Basic Setup screen.

Basic Setup

Host Channel Setup

GUIDE Plus+ System Information

2 Highlight the part you want to change.

You can change the Language, Country,

Postal Code

and the External Receiver settings.

3 Press ENTER to confirm.

Note

1 Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information.

This can take up to 24 hours.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 48 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

Manual Host Channel setup

The GUIDE Plus+ system will automatically identify your Host Channel as soon as the recorder is put into standby for the first time.

See the table on page 35 for a list of all the

European Host Channels.

If you know your Host Channel details

(source and programme number) or if the automatic identification did not provide the expected result, you can identify your Host

Channel manually. Select Host Channel

Setup in the Setup area and follow the instructions on the TV. Select the correct source (e.g., internal tuner or external receiver) and enter the respective programme number (e.g., if you have to press 9 on the remote to watch your Host

Channel, enter 9 as the programme number). When you next switch the recorder into standby the GUIDE Plus+ system will complete the Host Channel setup.

You can reset the Host Channel settings at any time back to the default setting of automatic. Please be aware that resetting the Host Channel will erase all TV listings data.

GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting

This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a complete list please consult the GUIDE

Plus+ website at: www.europe.guideplus.com

FAQ

• When I tried setting up my external receiver I could not get any of the attempts to work, what should I do?

There could be several reasons why your external receiver could not be controlled.

– The connections could be wrong. Make sure that the G-LINK cable is connected to the G-LINK connector on the recorder and the IR blaster is in front of the external receiver, pointing towards the

IR receiver of your external receiver. See

Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver on page 17.

– The code that is listed under your brand could be wrong. Please try other codes for your brand under satellite, cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area and choose one of the three options

(cable, satellite or terrestrial) that you have not already tried. Follow the onscreen prompts to make sure that the

GUIDE Plus+ system can change channels on your external receiver. If it does not work, repeat the process, choosing different reception and external receiver combinations until you have tried all the codes for your brand of receiver that are already in the GUIDE

Plus+ system. If it still does not work, see below on how to receive new codes overnight.

– The unit has not yet received new codes. The nightly data downloads frequently include new codes for controlling external receivers. Please tune your external receiver to your local host channel and leave it on overnight.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 49 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

Switch this recorder into standby. The next morning, please perform the GUIDE

Plus+ setup again to see if your external receiver can now be controlled.

– The external receiver that you use is currently not supported. If, after leaving your external receiver on overnight, and doing the Reception and External

Receiver Setup again, it still does not respond, please call Customer Support to report your brand and model.

• My external receiver was successfully setup. However I have found that when the GUIDE Plus+ system has to change to a channel with a three-digit programme number in the external receiver’s preset, it does not work. It looks like the GUIDE

Plus+ system can only send two digits.

With the number of channels increasing, the number of digits has increased as well. While older boxes use only two digits, newer boxes require up to four. It is possible that you selected an older code for your brand during set-up.

Please access the Setup Area, select

External Receiver and repeat the setup for your brand (Note: Every time you see the on-screen question about whether the receiver has changed to a certain channel, the GUIDE Plus+ system has sent a different code). Try all the different codes until your GUIDE Plus+ system can control your external receiver correctly. If you have no success, try to receive new codes overnight.

• I used to receive data through my terrestrial antenna or analog cable without a set-top box. Now, I have

“upgraded” to a satellite system or to digital cable with external receiver. What should I do to receive data for the GUIDE

Plus+ system?

You can try to receive your host channel through your new reception method. If you have problems to receive data we recommend that you keep your analog terrestrial or cable connection only to receive data this way. It is important that you identify your host channel correctly in the Editor Area.

• After I performed the initial set-up I found that the line-up for all the channels received via the external set top box is incorrect. How do I correct this?

You can change the line-up in the editor according to your preferences. Access the Editor Area. Select the channels that you would like to change. Change the source and preset number according to your preferences.

• I performed the set-up but after many hours I still have a blank EPG what is going wrong?

There are several possibilities:

– Connections are wrong. See

Connections on page 14 to double check everything.

– The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was completed incorrectly. Try setting it up again (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system on page 33).

– Your cabling and setup is OK, but the recorder has not been connected for enough time to receive the TV listings data. Leave the recorder in standby overnight.

– For external receiver users only: The connections and setup are OK, but the external receiver was not tuned to the correct host channel. Check the list of host channels (see step 5 of Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system on page 33) and leave the recorder in standby and the external receiver on overnight tuned to the correct host channel.

– You live in a country/region where the

GUIDE Plus+ system is not yet available.

Check the list of countries to see if you are in a region that is supported.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 50 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide

• I used the One-Button-Record feature (red

Action button) to set a recording, but I recorded the wrong channel.

If the channel to be recorded is received via the external receiver first make sure that the external receiver was left switched on. Next, in the Editor Area, make sure that the channel to be recorded is correctly set: Access the

Editor Area. Check the source and programme number of the channel that you wanted to record. Change the source and preset numbers if incorrect.

If you are recording from the recorder’s internal tuner (the A.TV

or D.TV

setting), make sure that the programme number is the same as the preset number set on this recorder. If they are different, go to the Editor Area and change the programme number to match the recorder’s preset number.

• The TV listings information doesn’t update.

The latest TV listings information is automatically downloaded by the recorder overnight. This only happens if the recorder is in standby; if the recorder is left on, it will not download. When not using the recorder, please switch it into standby.

Data downloads can take several hours.

The front panel display shows EPG when downloading. If you switch the recorder on while EPG is displayed, the download will be cancelled.

• The GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in my area, but when I switch the recorder into standby, after a while the front panel display shows EPG . Can I stop this from happening?

If the GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in your area, please do not set the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ setup (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system on page 33). When the GUIDE

Plus+ service starts in your area, please set the postal code again.

• The automatic Host Channel search failed or the GUIDE Plus+ system identified the wrong Host Channel for my region.

You can identify your Host Channel manually. See Manual Host Channel setup on page 48 for how to do this.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 51 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the digital electronic programme guide

Chapter 6

Using the digital electronic programme guide

This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type

Select setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup menu) is set to Digital EPG .

The Digital EPG system

The Digital EPG shows a table of scheduled digital TV programmes and detailed information about individual programmes. It also allows you easily to select and tune to a particular programme.

The Digital EPG screen consists of programme Information, Channel List and

General Programme List. This section describes information displayed in the schedule and information windows.

Note that the recorder’s clock must be set to the correct time and date to ensure all relevant EPG information is displayed.

General Programme List

5 Indicates the programme set for recording

6 Appears when other programmes (often short ones) have been scheduled for the same period

Programme title

Time dividers

• The general programme list may show sections whose bottom right corners have been folded. This indicates that other programmes have been scheduled for that period. To view the title of such a programme and related information, highlight a folded section, and then press

Programme information

D007

1 Appears when the schedule table can be scrolled forward or backward

2 Time schedule

3 Channel list

4 Highlights the currently selected channel

Channel number

Station name

3 Programme title

4 Appear when other programmes have been scheduled for the same period

Programme schedule

Programme genre

Note

1 EPG information is only viewable for D.TV programmes that provide EPG information.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 52 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the digital electronic programme guide

Using the Digital EPG

Using the Digital EPG you can check the schedule of digital TV programmes, view information about desired programmes, and/or select programmes.

GUIDE screen.

Press to display the Digital EPG

The EPG screen updates automatically if the

EPG data is acquired successfully. If not, the

Digital EPG screen shows a blank image.

D007

Select a TV programme.

• To quit the display of detailed information, press INFO again (or

RETURN/EXIT ).

D007

************

*************

**************************

13:40 14:05

More...

GUIDE screen.

Press to exit the Digital EPG

Setting timer programmes

Using the Digital EPG, it’s easy to set digital

TV programmes for recording

GUIDE screen.

Press to display the Digital EPG

• Press PREV/ NEXT to skip to the next or previous channel list page.

• Information about the selected programme appears in the information window.

• To watch a programme currently on air, select the programme (then press

ENTER ).

• You can check information about programmes scheduled up to one week ahead, depending on conditions.

• Depending on conditions, it may take some time to acquire EPG data.

INFO

3 Press to view more information about the selected programme.

Detailed information appears in the schedule window.

If the screen contains further information,

More ...

is displayed.

D007

ENTER

Select a programme.

• Select a programme currently on-air: press ENTER to close the Digital EPG screen and watch the channel immediately, or press RED to set the programme for recording immediately.

• Select a programme not yet started then press ENTER or RED to set the programme for recording.

Note

1 The general programme list does not show programmes that have already finished.

2 For more information on timer programmes, see About timer recordings on page 68.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 53 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the digital electronic programme guide

3 Enter the timer recording settings.

Use the

buttons to select a field; use the

buttons to change the value

Timer Programme Set

Manhattan Open Tennis

CH Date

D.TV003

SUN 1/4

Start

18:00

Stop

19:00

Detailed Settings

Record To

Recording Mode

VPS/PDC

Auto Replace Rec.

Genre

Enter Details

HDD

------

No Category

Extend

Off

Store Programme

Set Detailed

Set Title Name

Cancel

VPS/PDC 0/8

• CH – Choose a channel (Pr 1 to Pr 99 for analog channels and available digital channels (excluding skip channels)), or one of the external inputs from which to record.

• Date – Choose a date up to one month in advance, or select a daily or weekly programme.

• Start – Set the recording start time.

• Stop – Set the recording end time

(maximum length of a timer recording is

24 hours).

• Extend – Extend the end time of the timer recording (select Off , 10 , 20 or 30 mins.)

4 If you want to change the recording mode, recording destination, etc., select

‘Set Detailed’.

In this area you can set:

Record to – Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD for DVD recording

Recording Mode – Select from AUTO

, XP ,

SP , LP , EP , SLP , SEP (See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 64). If Manual

Recording is on, then you can also select the

LPCM setting, then use the

XP+ or MN (press ENTER

buttons to select the level).

VPS/PDC

– Choose whether or not to use

VPS/PDC when making timer recordings of analog programmes (see About timer recordings on page 68).

Auto Replace Rec.

– Automatically erases the previous daily or weekly recording when the next one is recorded.

Genre – Select a record genre (for HDD recording only).

Note

1 You cannot change the CH , Date , Start , Stop , Extend and title name when you have EPG Link set to On (see page 54).

2 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 135) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality ( MN4 for DVD+R/+RW) then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead.

• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.

3 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to

HDD.

4 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby.

• Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.

• Up to eight timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.

• VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO .

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 54 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the digital electronic programme guide

EPG Link

(UK only) – Choose whether or not to have this device automatically record scheduled programmes from the Digital

EPG even if the times in which they are broadcast change.

Series Recording

(UK only) – Choose whether or not to record all programmes from a series when you make a recording from the Digital EPG (for HDD recordings only).

5 After entering all the timer recording information, highlight ‘Store

Programme’ and press ENTER.

A red clock icon appears for the programme.

GUIDE screen.

Press to exit the Digital EPG

Tip

• To enter a title name for the timer recording in advance, select Set Title

Name and follow the on-screen display.

Editing a timer programme

You can change any of the settings in a timer programme before the recording is due to start. Even if a programme is currently being recorded, you can program a new end time or edit its extend time parameter.

TIMER

REC

1 Press to display the Timer

Programme View screen.

You can also access the Timer Programme

View screen from the Home Menu (press

HOME MENU , select Timer Recording , then Timer Recording ).

This screen shows all the timer programmes currently set.

Timer Programme View

VPS/PDC 0/8

Manhattan Open Tennis

SUN 25/3 18:00 – 19:00

World Journey

MON 26/3 19:30 – 21:00

Flower

MON – FRI 13:30 – 14:00

SUN 25/3 15:00

Pr 4

Tmr Pgms 3/32

Pr 6

Until 20/4

Pr 8

New Input

HDD Remain

DVD Remain

59h59m(SP)

1h59m(SP)

• Each row is for one timer recording programme, with the date and time information, channel, recording mode,

DVD or HDD and recording status.

• The amount of free space available on the HDD and the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown towards the bottom of the screen.

• In the upper-right corner, the number of timer programmes already set is shown next to Tmr Pgms .

• If there are more than five timer programmes already set, press

NEXT to switch page (go back using the PREV button).

• You can also delete a timer programme before it’s started (before the recorder enters timer recording standby) by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR . See also Deleting a timer programme on page 56.

Note

1 • You cannot set an EPG Link when recording mode is set to AUTO .

• You cannot change the CH , Date , Start , Stop , Extend and title name when you have EPG Link set to On .

• When you have EPG Link set to On and you set a timer recording for a programme that is divided into multiple parts, all parts of that programme are recorded automatically. In the programme list, the earliest part of the programme to be recorded has a red icon, with successive parts indicated by a gray icon. Data provided by the broadcaster determines which programmes are classified as divided programmes.

2 • In the programme list, the earliest programme to be recorded has a red icon, with successive programmes indicated by a gray icon.

• There is a limit to the number of programmes you can schedule to record with the Series Recording function.

• Data provided by the broadcaster determines which programmes are classified as part of a series.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 55 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the digital electronic programme guide

• Cancel Once – A regular timer programme is set to skip.

2 Highlight the timer programme you want to change

....

If you want to set a new timer programme,

• Can’t Rec – Not possible to record.

• Title Over – Can’t record because there is already the maximum number of titles select ‘New Input’ and skip to step 4 .

on the disc (HDD: 999; DVD: 99).

ENTER

3 Press then select ‘Modify’ from the command menu panel.

Alternatively, press ENTER .

The Timer Programme Set screen appears from which you can edit the settings.

ENTER

4 Enter the timer recording settings.

Use the

/ the

buttons to select a field; use

buttons to change the value. For more information on the options available at the Timer Programme Set screen, See

Setting timer programmes on page 52.

• Recording – The programme is currently recording.

• Standby – The recorder is in timer recording standby.

• Valid Until ... (eg., Valid Until 13/8 ) (UK only) – When you have set to make a series recording of a programme that has no new scheduled broadcasts, the date displayed indicates the last day until which the scheduled programme settings remain valid. (If the programme is not broadcast for over 13 weeks, its settings are automatically deleted.)

• No Broadcast (UK only) – Displays when a programme for which you had the EPG

Link set to On does not record because the date of the scheduled recording has already passed.

• nothing displayed – Another timer recording or copying is in progress.

ENTER

5 After entering all the timer recording information, highlight ‘Store

Programme’ and press ENTER.

The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The timer programme you just input appears in the list. The rightmost column shows various timer recording status messages:

• OK – Can be recorded.

• Time Over – Not enough space on the

HDD (the recording won’t finish).

• Over 12h – Recording time of over 12 hours set (when recording to the HDD the recording will be split into two titles).

• Overlap – Two timer programmes partially or completely overlap. The one starting earlier will take priority.

• Until ... (eg., Until 13/8 ) – For a regular recording, the last programme that could be recorded is shown.

• Data Over – Can’t record because the disc management area of the disc is full.

HOME MENU

Press to exit the timer recording screen.

Note

• If you set a DVD timer recording but there is no recordable DVD disc loaded, or the disc loaded doesn’t have enough free space for the complete recording,

Recovery is shown. In this case (unless you load a suitable disc before the recording actually starts), the recorder will use the HDD for recording. (The message Can’t Rec will appear if there are already 999 titles on the HDD or if there is not enough free space on the

HDD for recording.)

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 56 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the digital electronic programme guide

• When you have EPG Link or Series

Recording set to On , any changes in broadcast time or division of broadcasts are automatically accommodated for and your scheduled recordings are carried out without any additional settings. As a result, even when you have not scheduled programmes to record at the same time, changes in broadcasting schedules can cause scheduled recordings to overlap.

Deleting a timer programme

You can delete timer programmes you no longer need.

TIMER

REC

Press TIMER REC.

ENTER

3 Press then select ‘Cancel

Once’ from the command menu panel.

• In the timer programme list, Cancel

Once appears by the programme.

• You can also just press PAUSE when the timer programme is highlighted.

Checking for alternative broadcast times

(UK only)

You can check to see if a programme you have scheduled to record is airing at an alternative time slot

TIMER

REC

Press TIMER REC.

2 Highlight the timer programme you want to erase

....

2 Highlight the timer programme you want to search.

ENTER

3 Press then select ‘Erase’ from the command menu panel.

• Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel.

• You can also just press CLEAR when the timer programme is highlighted.

Skipping a regular timer programme

If you’ve set a regular daily or weekly timer programme, you can set the recorder to skip the next scheduled recording.

TIMER

REC

Press TIMER REC.

ENTER

3 Press then select ‘Alternate

Search’ from the command menu panel.

• The search results are displayed.

Choose the programme you would like to record and press either the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording.

Searching for series

(UK only)

You can search for broadcasts of programmes of the same series as a programme you have scheduled to record

TIMER

REC

Press TIMER REC.

2 Highlight the timer programme you want to skip

....

2 Highlight the timer programme you want to search.

Note

1 • Programme search results are based upon data provided by the broadcaster.

• This function may not be applicable to all programmes.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 57 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the digital electronic programme guide

Other useful EPG functions

ENTER

3 Press then select ‘Series

Search’ from the command menu panel.

• The search results are displayed.

Choose the programme you would like to record and press either the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording.

Searching for recommendations

(UK only)

You can search for recommended programmes generated from the content of the programmes you have scheduled to record

TIMER

REC

Press TIMER REC.

EPG Jump

1 Press GREEN when the Digital EPG screen (Programme List, Detailed information or Search Result) is displayed.

2 In the ‘Date’ field select a date

(within one week) to jump to.

Date

Time

Jump

Mon.13.Sep

14:00

Cancel

2 Highlight the timer programme you want to search.

3 In the ‘Time’ field select a time of the day (0:00 to 23:00) to jump to.

ENTER

3 Press then select

‘Recommendation Search’ from the command menu panel.

The search results are displayed. Choose the programme you would like to record and press either the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording.

ENTER

4 Select ‘Jump’.

The Programme List for the specified day and time is displayed.

EPG Search

1 Press YELLOW when the EPG screen

(Programme List, Detailed information or

Search Result) is displayed.

2 In the ‘Date’ field select a date

(within one week) to search in.

•

Date

Time

Genre

0/16

•

Sun.12.Sep

12:00

Select

Search Cancel

Note

1 • Programme search results are based upon data provided by the broadcaster.

• This function may not be applicable to all programmes.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 58 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the digital electronic programme guide

3 In the ‘Time’ field select the time of day (0:00 to 23:00) to search in.

4 In the ‘Genre’ field, select the genre to search for.

You can search for multiple genres by pressing ENTER after each genre.

ENTER

Select ‘OK’.

ENTER

6 Select ‘Search’.

The results of your search are displayed.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 59 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

Chapter 7

Recording

About DVD recording

This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-

RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R

DL and DVD+R DL media.

DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for Video mode or VR mode recording. Each has its advantages, and it depends on what you want to do with the recording which mode you choose.

If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way, VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying, and changing the way the video is presented.

Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard DVD players

(many of which won’t play VR mode discs

Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all recording on that disc will be in that mode.

DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR mode recording.

DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR mode recording.

DVD+R discs do not require initializing.

Important

• The table below shows the maximum number of titles recordable per disc and the maximum number of chapters per title:

Disc type/rec. format

DVD-R/-RW

Video mode

DVD-R/-RW/-RAM

VR mode

DVD+R/+RW

Max. titles

(per disc)

Max. chapters

(per title)

999

A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc.

A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc.

• This recorder cannot play or record unfinalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R discs recorded on another recorder. DVD+RW discs recorded on another recorder are playable on this recorder but are not recordable.

• The maximum continuous recording time for one title is eight hours when using a DVD+R/+RW disc.

• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the total number of recordable titles remaining may not increase.

• Although this recorder can record PAL,

SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 141.

• Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on a disc can affect playback and/or recording performance. Please take proper care of your discs.

• Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the recorder.

Note

1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 60 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

• See also Disc/content format playback compatibility on page 7 for detailed disc compatibility information.

Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs

Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is generally the same as recording to regular single-layer discs; however, please note the following points:

• When the recorder switches from the first layer to the second during recording a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc, a new title is automatically started on the new layer.

• Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a

DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc. If the 99th title is being recorded when the layer is switched, recording will stop.

• Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a

DVD+R DL disc.

• You cannot play, record additional material to, edit or finalize a DVD-R DL or

DVD+R DL disc that has been recorded on but not yet finalized on another DVD recorder.

About HDD recording

Recording to the hard disk drive (HDD) is very flexible; you have the full choice of recording quality options, including manual mode, and of course you can record, erase and re-record as many times as you like.

The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can store many hours of video on it, even using the higher quality recording modes.

Important

• The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that can be recorded on the

HDD is 999 and 99 respectively. No more recording is possible on the HDD after the maximum number of titles has been reached.

• The maximum continuous recording time for one title is 12 hours.

• It is possible to record both PAL and

NTSC titles on the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure that the Input Line System setting (page 141) matches the TV line system of the source you’re recording.

HDD Video mode compatibility

When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see page 136).

When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW is possible. When recording a bilingual broadcast, set which channel you want to record from the Initial

Setup menu (see Bilingual Recording on page 132).

When HDD Recording Format is set to Video

Mode Off, high-speed copying from HDD to

DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW isn’t possible. However, both channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you can switch the audio on playback.

Recorded audio

In all except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format

(only Dolby Digital 2.0 can be recorded; Dolby

Digital 5.1 recording is not possible) . When set to LPCM , sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format.

If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode),

DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD with the HDD

Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual

Recording setting (page 132) to select the

A/L or B/R audio channel to record before recording starts. In other cases, both channels of a bilingual broadcast will be recorded and you can switch on playback.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 61 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

Restrictions on video recording

You cannot record copy-protected video using this recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material is encountered during a recording, recording will pause automatically and an error message will be displayed on-screen.

Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded to DVD-RAM or HDD, CPRMcompatible VR mode DVD-R/-RW (see below).

When recording a TV broadcast or through an external input, you can display copy control information on screen (see

Displaying disc information on-screen on page 84).

Copying of copyrighted material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision

Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by

Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Using the built-in A.TV and

D.TV tuners

Switching between A.TV and D.TV tuners

CPRM

CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed for the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast programmes. CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media .

This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that you can record copy-once broadcast programmes, but you cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be made on CPRMcompatible DVD-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or

DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the HDD.

DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM.

A.TV/D.TV

• Press to switch between D.TV

(digital) and A.TV (analog).

Changing channels

There are a number of ways to select analog and digital TV channels.

Note that you can’t change the TV channel during playback, recording or during recording standby.

CHANNEL

• –

CHANNEL

Smart Jog

Recording equipment and copyright

Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying. You are advised to check carefully what constitutes lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy.

• Number buttons

For example, to select channel 4 (digital channel D004), press 4 then ENTER ; for channel 34 (digital channel D034), press

3 , 4 , ENTER .

• CH +/– buttons on the front panel.

• For D.TV channels only, you can also use the Channel List — see below.

Note

1 • If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it.

• While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for three minutes.

2 Analog channel presets are numbered 1 to 99; digital channel presets are numbered D001 to D999.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 62 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

Tip

• When changing terrestrial digital broadcast channels, channels with a low signal strength may result in a black screen being displayed.

• For other channels, it may take a short while for the channel picture to appear, and/or for the channel number to appear.

• In both of the above cases, some improvement may be possible by adjusting the antenna.

Using the D.TV Channel List

When in D.TV mode, you can call up the onscreen Channel List anytime by pressing ENTER .

Use the

buttons to select a channel, then press ENTER to switch to that channel.

D001 ************

D002 ************

D003 ******

D004 ************

D005 ****

D006 ******

• The channel banner displays the Subtitles

( ) and Teletext/MHEG ( ) icon if they apply to the selected channel.

• To see more detailed channel information, press INFO again.

Now

************************

11:30 12:00

More...

Use the

buttons to display information about previous and following programmes. Use the

buttons to see information about other channels.

• If there is still more information to be displayed, More ...

is displayed; press the BLUE button to see the extra information.

• To hide the channel banner, press

RETURN/EXIT .

Changing D.TV audio languages

AUDIO

• Press to display the current audio language. Press repeatedly to change it to other available languages.

Displaying a channel banner

A channel banner shows programme titles, start and end times of the current programme and other channel information.

The information is updated every minute.

INFO

• Press to display the channel banner for the current channel.

D001 ************

Now

********************

Next

*************

Wed.30.Apr 12:46

11:30 12:00

12:00 12:30

• Use the

buttons to display the channel banner for other channels. To switch to the displayed banner’s channel, press ENTER .

Changing D.TV subtitle languages

SUBTITLE

• Press to display the current subtitle language. Press repeatedly to change it to other available languages.

Using the MHEG application

(UK only)

Some stations bring you programmes with the MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia

Expert Group) application encoded, letting you experience D.TV interactively.

Note

1 • If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it.

• While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for three minutes.

2 Due to inaccurate information provided by the broadcaster, some icons may occasionally be present or absent in error.

3 Not all channels supply more detailed information.

4 If you start recording while the MHEG application is running, the MHEG application screen will also be recorded. To avoid this, quit the application first, then start recording. It is not possible to start the MHEG application while recording is in progress.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 63 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

The channel banner displays an icon ( ) to indicate that the MHEG application can be run.

TEXT

• Press to start the MHEG application.

• You can also use any of the colour buttons.

• Press TEXT to quit the MHEG application.

Viewing Teletext

(European countries except the UK.)

You can view the Teletext that comes simultaneously with certain programmes.

TEXT

• Press to display the Teletext.

• You can also use any of the colour buttons.

• Press the TEXT button again to hide the

Teletext screen.

Changing A.TV audio channels

You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or external input signal.

AUDIO

• Press to change the audio type.

The current audio channel is displayed onscreen.

• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM

Select on page 132) is set to NICAM and you are watching a NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM and

Regular (non-NICAM) audio.

NICAM

Regular

• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also select the language.

NICAM A NICAM B

Regular NICAM A+B

• You can also select the language for a non-NICAM bilingual broadcast.

A (L) B (R)

A + B (L+R)

• When watching a recording made from an external input with Bilingual recording selected (see External Audio on page 132), you can switch the audio channel between left ( L ), right ( R ) or both

( L+R ).

L R

L+R

Note

• When recording to the HDD with HDD

Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), to DVD+R/

+RW, or on the LPCM setting, only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide which language you want to record before recording by setting the Bilingual

Recording setting (see Bilingual

Recording on page 132).

Switching between TV and DVD

When the recorder is stopped or recording you can choose whether to have the audio/ video from the built-in TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’), or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV mode’).

During playback or when a menu is being displayed on-screen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting.

Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.

TV/DVD

• Switch between TV mode and

DVD mode.

Note

1 This function is not available when subtitle display is active.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 64 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

Setting the picture quality/ recording time

DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard settings available, which allow you to choose a balance between picture quality and recording time.

When Manual Recording is set to On (see

Manual Recording on page 135), a further option will be available ( MN1 to MN32 ,

LPCM , or XP+ (a super-high quality HDD recording mode that features a transfer rate of around 15 Mbps) depending on what you set).

When recording to DVD, MN32 is the highest recording quality available. If you select XP+ , the recording mode will automatically revert to MN32 .

When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the longest recording time available. If you select SEP or MN1 to MN3 , the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP .

REC MODE

• Press repeatedly to select the recording quality.

• XP – High quality setting, gives about one hour of recording time on a DVD disc.

• SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, used for most applications, gives about two hours of recording time on a DVD.

• LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than

SP, but doubles the recording time on a

DVD to about four hours.

• EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than

LP, but gives about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc.

• SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD disc.

• SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest video quality but gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD disc.

• MN1 to MN32 / LPCM

/ XP+

– Manual/

Linear PCM/XP+ (available only when manual recording is on).

The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and shown on-screen together with the recording time for a blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the approximate remaining recording time for that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On

Screen Display setting (see On Screen

Display on page 139) is Off then this information is not displayed.)

Basic recording from the TV

DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

Basic recording from the TV involves just setting the channel to record, choosing whether to record to the HDD or a DVD and selecting the recording quality.

HDD/DVD

1 Select the HDD or DVD for recording.

• If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if you load a new blank

DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc).

• If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R or a Video mode DVD-RW, you must initialize it before proceeding (see

Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 72).

A.TV/D.TV

2 Press to switch between D.TV

(digital) and A.TV (analog).

Note

1 Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio channel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 132).

2 Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is used.) When copied to DVD, XP+ recordings are always copied in real time.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 65 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

CHANNEL

–

CHANNEL

Select a TV channel to record.

The front panel display shows the channel number, or channel name if it’s available:

A.TV Channel preset

• While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the number buttons on the remote to select the channel (For channel 24, press 2 , 4 then ENTER ).

• If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the CH +/– buttons on the front panel to select the channel number.

REC MODE

Set the picture quality/recording time.

• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 64 for detailed instructions.

AUDIO

5 If you’re recording from the A.TV tuner, select the audio channel to record.

See Changing A.TV audio channels on page 63 for more on this.

• When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback.

The only exception to this is when the picture quality is set to LPCM , in which case you do need to select the audio channel before recording.

AUDIO

6 If you’re recording from the D.TV tuner, select the audio language to record.

• You may also be able to set which subtitle language to record; use

SUBTITLE to select.

• Note that audio and subtitle languages cannot be changed during the recording of a digital broadcast.

REC

7 Start recording.

If you want to set a recording end time, press the REC button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30 minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder automatically switches into standby if no other operation is being performed.

• To cancel the set recording time, press

REC .

• If you want to pause recording at any time

, press PAUSE . Press again to restart the recording (If recording to the

HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a new chapter is started after recording restarts).

STOP REC

8 Press to stop recording.

• If you set the recording time in the previous step, you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing

STOP REC .

• Recording will stop automatically when there is no more space on the HDD/

DVD, or after 12 hours of HDD recording

(whichever is sooner).

Tip

• During recording you can turn on/off the

SCART loop through function. During recording, press the front panel CH + button to switch to SCART THRU (loop through on), or CH – to switch to SCART

NORM (loop through off). Loop through is automatically reset to off after recording has finished. Note that you can’t switch loop through on if recording from the AV1(RGB)-TV connector.

Note

1 Except during Chase Play.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 66 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

Pause Live TV

HDD

The Pause Live TV feature lets you effectively pause a TV programme you’re watching.

When you’re ready to resume watching, just press the PLAY button.

Setting up for Pause Live TV

You can use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Link-compatible TV connected using a

SCART cable (see TV tuner setup for Pause

Live TV below), or using this recorder’s internal tuner (see Using the recorder’s internal tuner for Pause Live TV below).

TV tuner setup for Pause Live TV

To use this feature with an external TV tuner, the recorder must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable, and the AV. Link setting (page 139) should be set to This

Recorder Only .

See also Pause Live TV on page 140 for more on this.

In order to use Pause Live TV, make the following connections and settings.

• Pause Live TV will not work as expected when watching TV via an external component such as a VCR or digital tuner. It only works with the channel selected on the TV.

1 Connect this recorder to your TV with a SCART cable.

2 Press HOME MENU.

3 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Options2’ >

‘Pause Live TV’ > ‘TV’s Tuner’.

4 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Analog Tuner’

> ‘Auto Channel Setting’ > ‘Download from TV’.

• If the Download from TV option appears grayed out, check the connections to your TV and try again.

• Depending on your TV, you might have to switch off and unplug it for a few moments before plugging it back in and switching it on again.

5 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Using the recorder’s internal tuner for

Pause Live TV

If you haven’t connected to your TV using a

SCART cable (or your TV is not compatible with AV Link) you can use the recorder’s internal tuner for the Pause Live TV.

1 Press HOME MENU.

2 Select ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Options2’ >

‘Pause Live TV’ > ‘Recorder’s Tuner’.

See Pause Live TV on page 140 to do this.

You can record the channel selected on the recorder.

Important

• Pause Live TV only works with the built-in

A.TV (analog) tuner. It does not work with the D.TV tuner or the external inputs.

Make sure the Auto Channel Setting is set to Download from TV (see Auto

Channel Setting on page 130).

Note

1 • Not all TVs support this feature. Check the instructions that came with your TV if you are unsure.

• This feature will not work unless your TV is compatible with AV Link. See the operating instructions that came with your TV if you’re unsure about your TV’s compatibility with this feature.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 67 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

Using Pause Live TV

PAUSE

LIVE TV

Start recording the current TV channel.

Recording continues with playback paused.

• Note that it may take up to 10 seconds for recording to start.

2 Press to start playback.

You can also use the scan buttons (

), pause ( PAUSE ) and stop ( STOP )

— all without affecting the recording.

STOP REC

3 Press to stop the recording.

The operation is slightly different depending on the viewing source. See the Operation table below for details.

Tip

• When the Pause Live TV setting (see page 140) is set to TV’s Tuner , you can press PAUSE LIVE TV while the recorder is in standby to switch on and immediately start recording. When set to Recorder’s

Tuner , it is not possible to use the Pause

Live TV feature from standby.

• After pressing PAUSE LIVE TV , it will take at least 10 seconds for the picture to change (during this time, all controls except the power button are inoperative).

(Note that startup from standby is not possible if you have selected Recorder’s

Tuner in Pause Live TV on page 140.)

• Please note that you can’t record from another component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART cable to the AV2

(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector using the Pause Live TV feature.

Operation table

Viewing source

TV built-in analog tuner

TV/DVD mode of

DVR

DVR source

Pause Live TV function button

TV – Pause Live TV

Direct TV recording *1

TV built-in digital tuner

TV – Direct TV recording *1

Condition

External input of TV

DVR built-in analog tuner

DVR built-in digital tuner

TV – Direct TV recording *1

DVD DVR built-in analog tuner

Pause Live TV

DVD DVR built-in digital tuner

Pause Live TV

*1 No Chase Play! Warning if you change input this will stop the recording.

Preset channel of DVR and TV are matched after downloading from TV.

Preset channel of DVR and TV are NOT matched after downloading from TV.

Record TV programme that you’re watching.

Preset channel info. in D.TV cannot be shared by DVR even after Download from

TV. Record TV programme that you’re watching.

Record TV programme that you’re watching.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 68 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

About timer recordings

DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

Using the timer recording features you can program up to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer recording programmes can be set to record just once, every day, or every week.

You can set the recording quality for your timer recording in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if recording to the HDD).

You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to automatically replace the previous timer recording with the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the previous recording made on that timer programme will be replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have watched it yet or not.

You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set

(see Optimized Rec on page 135 for more on this).

Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the recording, the

Recovery Recording feature will automatically record the programme to the

HDD for you.

This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video

Programming System) and PDC

(Programme Delivery Control) systems used by many analog TV stations to ensure that a timer recording catches the whole programme even when the programme is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer programmes can be set with VPS/PDC on.

Important

• A timer recording can’t be set if there are already 32 timer programmes waiting to be recorded.

• Timer recording will not start if:

– The recorder is already recording.

– A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.

• Timer recording will start when the operation preventing timer recording has finished.

• When the front panel display is set to

ON, the timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel display when the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording) there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not recordable).

• Approximately two minutes before a timer recording is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use some functions.

• The maximum length for timer recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours.

However, because one title (HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12 hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there will be a break in the recording of a few seconds between titles.

• VPS/PDC works only with analog stations; it does not work with digital TV stations.

• VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in your country/area.

Check with the stations for compatibility.

• The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the morning are used by the GUIDE Plus+ system to download programme information. During these times, VPS/

PDC may not work reliably; leave VPS/

PDC off if you set a timer recording for these times.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 69 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

• If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programmes that are programmed to start at the same time, then the programme that actually starts first takes priority.

Extending a timer recording in progress

You can extend a timer recording beyond the programmed end time. This can be useful if a broadcast programme overruns, for example.

Cancelling or extending the timer

REC

1 Press and hold for three seconds during a timer recording.

Recording continues, but the timer indicator disappears from the front panel display indicating that the timer has been cancelled.

REC

2 Press repeatedly to extend recording in 30 minute blocks.

Stopping a timer recording

STOP REC

Press during a timer recording.

ENTER

2 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm.

Preventing use of the recorder before a timer recording (child lock)

You can make all the front panel and remote control buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is useful when you set a timer recording and want to make sure that the timer settings are not changed before recording has finished.

STANDBY/ON

1 If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.

2 [Front panel] Press and hold for three seconds to lock the controls.

The front panel display briefly shows

LOCKED . If any buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCKED is briefly displayed again.

• To unlock the recorder, press and hold

(Stop) on the front panel (while the recorder is stopped) for three seconds until the display shows UNLOCKED .

Timer recording FAQ

Frequently Asked Questions

• Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start recording!

Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on page 121), and that there are fewer than

99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.

• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer programme! Why not?

You can’t enter a timer programme if the clock isn’t set.

• What happens when two or more timer programmes overlap?

Basically, the programme with the earlier recording start time has priority.

However, the recorder will start recording the programme with the later start time after the earlier programme is finished. If schedule to record two programmes have the same times (but different channels, for example), then only one of the two programmes will be recorded. In this event you should cancel the scheduled recording of the lesser important programme. If one of the overlapping programmes is a regular timer programme for a digital broadcast, you may choose ‘Cancel Once’ in order to avoid having it overlap with a separately scheduled programme (see

Skipping a regular timer programme on page 56) .

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 70 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play)

Also, during simultaneous recording and playback, if the TV line system of the playback track/title changes then playback will automatically stop.

HDD

Chase Play allows you to watch a recording that is still in progress from the start, without having to wait until the recording has finished (i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the recording).

In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording in progress. You can watch anything else already on the HDD (or on a

DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen

(see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on page 78).

Chase Play is not possible when DV is the recording input.

• Press during recording to start playback from the beginning of the current recording

•

DISC

NAVIGATOR

Press during recording to select another title to play.

You can use all the usual playback controls, such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.

• To stop playback, press

(recording will continue).

STOP

• To stop recording, press

(playback will continue).

STOP REC

• During recording or in timer recording standby, you can’t play an HDD title,

DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc if the

Input Line System setting doesn’t match the TV line system of the disc/HDD title

(see also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 141).

Recording from an external component

DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

You can record from an external component, such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s external inputs.

1 Make sure that the component you want to record from is connected properly to the HDD/DVD recorder.

See Chapter 2 ( Connecting up ) for connection options.

INPUT SELECT

Press repeatedly to select one of the external inputs to record from.

The current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel display:

• AV2/L1 – Input 1

• L2 – Input 2 (front panel)

• L3 – Input 3

Check that the Audio In settings for

External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 132).

• If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched), adjust on the source component or your TV before recording.

• To watch video coming in via the DV input (front panel), select DV > DV

Video Playback from the Home Menu

(see also Playing from a DV camcorder on page 85).

REC MODE

Set the recording quality.

• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 64 for detailed information.

Note

1 You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work while copying or backing up.

2 This cannot be selected if AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 132).

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 71 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

HDD/DVD

4 Select the HDD or DVD for recording.

REC

5 Press to start recording.

• If your source is copy-protected using

Copy Guard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 61 for more details.

Playing your recordings on other DVD players

DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW

Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R discs. A number of players

(including many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Most players will not play VR mode DVD-R discs, although some DVD-

ROM drives and DVD recorders may be able to (finalization might be necessary). Check the manual that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will play.

When you finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R disc, a title menu is created from which you can select titles when you play the disc. There are a number of different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc.

All the title menus are navigated in the usual way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then using the

///

followed by ENTER to select titles and start playback.

Finalizing a disc

DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW

Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc so that it can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable

DVD-ROM drive.

Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc Name on page 121 before starting the steps below.

DVD+RW discs don’t generally need finalizing. However, if you want a title menu to appear when you play the disc, then you will need to finalize. When using a

DVD+RW, you can still record and edit even after finalizing. although the title menu will disappear if you do so. Finalize the disc again to generate a new title menu.

Important

• Once you’ve finalized a DVD-R/-RW

(Video mode) or DVD+R disc, you can’t edit or record anything else on that disc.

However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe ‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 122 for how to do this.

• A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-

R DL) disc can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even after finalizing.

• DVD-R DL (Video mode) discs and

DVD+R DL discs must be finalized in order to play in other recorders/players.

Note however that some recorders/ players will not play even finalized duallayer discs.

Note

1 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 141 for how to change the recorder’s setting.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 72 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

1 Load the disc you want to finalize.

Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding.

HOME MENU

Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the

Home Menu.

ENTER

3 Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ >

‘Next Screen’.

Disc Setup

Basic

Initialize

Optimize HDD

Finalize

Undo Finalize

Next Screen

Start

5 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.

During finalization:

• If the finalization process of a DVD-RW or DVD+R/+RW disc is going to take more than around four minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes before completion, the option to cancel disappears.

• You can’t cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R disc.

• How long finalization takes depends on the type of disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can take up to one hour to finalize. DVD-R/

-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R/+RW discs can take up to 20 minutes.

ENTER

4 For DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R/+RW discs only, select a title menu style, then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to cancel.

The menu you select will be the one that appears when the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for a DVD+R/+RW) is selected on any DVD player.

Finalize

• Discs recorded partially or fully on the

Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on this recorder.

Initializing recordable DVD discs

DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM

DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either

Video mode recording or VR mode recording.

When you first load a blank DVD-RW or

DVD+RW disc, the recorder initializes it for recording automatically. By default, blank

DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 73 if you want to change the default to

Video mode.

DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode recording, you must initialize it before recording anything on the disc.

DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized in order to erase the contents of the disc.

Note

1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 73 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Recording

Important

• Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or

DVD-RAM disc will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want to keep!

• You may not be able to re-initialize a

DVD-RW disc in a different format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD recorder.

• Once initialized for VR mode recording, you can’t re-initialize a DVD-R back to

Video mode.

1 HOME MENU Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the

Home Menu.

ENTER

2 Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video

Mode’, ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Initialize

DVD+RW’.

Basic

Disc Setup

Finalize

Optimize HDD

VR Mode

Video Mode

Initialize DVD+RW

Start

DVD-RW Auto Initialize

DVD-RW

• Default setting: VR Mode

Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired initialization mode before inserting a disc.

HOME MENU

Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the

Home Menu.

ENTER

2 Select ‘Basic’>’DVD-RW Auto

Init.’, then ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Video Mode’.

Disc Setup

Initialize

Finalize

Optimize HDD

Input Disc Name

Lock Disc

DVD-RW Auto Init.

VR Mode

Video Mode

ENTER

3 Select ‘Start’.

It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc (except DVD-RAM discs, which can take up to an hour).

Initializing Disc

1 min left

Pr 1

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 74 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Playback

Chapter 8

Playback

Introduction

Most of the features described in this chapter make use of on-screen displays.

Navigate these using the cursor buttons and

ENTER . To go back one level from any screen, use the RETURN/EXIT button.

Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons do what.

Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Video

CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/DivX discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded.

• Many functions are not available when a

Video CD is playing in PBC mode. Start playback from the Disc Navigator screen for non-PBC playback (see Using the

Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 79).

• For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The PhotoViewer on page 113.

Basic playback

A L L

This section shows you how to use your recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of video from the

HDD.

Important

• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means any kind of playable or recordable

DVD. If a function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified.

• Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and

DVD+RW discs don’t allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction.

HDD/DVD

1 Select the HDD or DVD for playback.

• If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 3 below.

• Select DVD for any kind of disc playback.

OPEN/CLOSE

[Front panel] Load a disc.

Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to play face down).

• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read the note on page 76.

3 Start playback.

• If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video

CD, a disc menu may appear when you start playback. Use the

/// buttons, number buttons, and ENTER to navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for Video

CD menus.

• When playing video from the HDD, playback will automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.

• There may be a slight pause when playback switches from the first to the second layer of a dual-layer disc.

• See the following sections for more details on playing specific kinds of discs.

STOP

4 Press to stop playback.

5 When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 75 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Playback

Playing DVD discs

The table below shows the basic playback controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.

Press to start playback.

If RESUME is displayed onscreen, playback starts from the place last stopped.

STOP

Press to stop playback.

You can resume playback from the same point by pressing

PLAY . (Press STOP again to cancel the resume function.)

PAUSE

Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.

PREV

Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed.

NEXT

Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (During playback you can also use the front panel

CH +/– buttons.)

DVD+R/DVD+RW only:

PREV may not always skip to the previous title.

CLEAR CLEAR

ENTER

Except VR mode: During playback, enter a chapter number then press ENTER to skip directly to that chapter within the currently playing title.

On some discs, you can also use the number buttons to select numbered items in the disc menu.

VR mode only: During playback, enter a title number then press

ENTER .

All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again.

CM BACK

CM SKIP

(Commercial back/skip)

Turn the Smart Jog counterclockwise for backward skip; turn clockwise for forward skip.

You can search up to two hours in either direction.

TOP MENU

DISC

NAVIGATOR

ENTER

While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback.

Press repeatedly to change the playback speed.

While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. You can also execute frame-by-frame playback/backward scanning via the

Smart Jog .

MENU

Press to display the menu of a

DVD-Video disc. (DVD+R/+RW discs finalized on this recorder will display the Disc Navigator.

Press MENU to display the disc menu.)

Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD-Video disc menus; press ENTER to select items.

RETURN/EXIT

Press to return to the previous level of a DVD-Video disc menu.

Playing from the HDD

The table below shows the basic playback controls when playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).

Press to start playback.

If RESUME is displayed onscreen, playback starts from the place last stopped. Playback automatically stops after the end of a title is reached.

STOP

Press to stop playback.

You can resume playback from the same point by pressing

PLAY . (Press STOP again to cancel the resume function.)

PAUSE

Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.

Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 76 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Playback

PREV NEXT

Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (During playback you can also use the front panel

CH +/– buttons.)

CLEAR CLEAR

During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER to skip directly to that title.

Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again.

ENTER

/ /

CM BACK

CM SKIP

(Commercial back/skip)

Turn the Smart Jog counterclockwise for backward skip; turn clockwise for forward skip.

You can search up to two hours in either direction.

While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback.

Press repeatedly to change the playback speed.

While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. You can also execute frame-by-frame playback/backward scanning via the

Smart Jog .

Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs

The table below shows the basic playback controls for audio CDs

, and WMA/MP3 files.

Press to start playback.

STOP

Press to stop playback.

PREV

Except WMA: Press to start scanning. Press again to increase the scanning speed.

(There are two scan speeds; the current scan speed is shown on-screen.)

NEXT

Press to skip to previous/next track (or folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/– buttons.)

CLEAR CLEAR

During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track.

Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again.

ENTER

Playing Video CD/Super VCDs

The table below shows the basic playback controls for Video CD/Super VCDs.

Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short) menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you load them and display a menu on-screen from where you can select what to watch.

Press to start playback.

Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback starts from the place last stopped.

STOP

Press to stop playback.

Video CD only: You can resume playback from the same point by pressing PLAY . (Press

STOP again to cancel the resume function.)

PAUSE

Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.

Note

1 If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 83).

2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and programme play are not available. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc

Navigator (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 79).

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 77 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Playback

PAUSE

Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.

Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed.

PREV NEXT

Press to skip to previous/next track.

When a PBC menu is displayed, press to display the previous/next page. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/– buttons.)

CLEAR CLEAR

ENTER

During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track.

Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again.

While a PBC menu screen is displayed, use to select numbered menu items.

CM BACK

CM SKIP

Video CD in non-PBC mode only:

(Commercial back/skip)

Turn the Smart Jog counterclockwise for backward skip; turn clockwise for forward skip.

You can search up to two hours in either direction.

While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback.

Press repeatedly to change the playback speed (forward only).

While paused, press to advance a single frame (forward only).

You can also execute frame-byframe playback via the

Smart Jog .

RETURN/EXIT

Press to display the disc menu of a Video CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.

Playing DivX video files

The table below shows the basic playback controls for DivX video files.

Press to start playback.

If RESUME is displayed onscreen, playback starts from the place last stopped. Playback of titles (DivX files) proceeds in alphabetical order.

STOP

Press to stop playback.

You can resume playback from the same point by pressing

PLAY . (Press STOP again to cancel the resume function.)

PAUSE

Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.

PREV

Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed.

NEXT

Press to skip to previous/next title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/– buttons.)

While paused, press to advance one frame. Press and hold to start slow motion playback

(press repeatedly to change the slow motion play speed). You can also execute frame-byframe playback via the

Smart Jog .

AUDIO

Press to display the playback audio type; press repeatedly to change the playback audio type.

SUBTITLE

Press to display subtitle information; press repeatedly to change subtitles.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 78 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Playback

Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc

Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc and start playback.

Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD

DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video on recordable DVDs and the

HDD, and to view information on titles.

See also Editing on page 88 for more on editing recordable discs.

HDD/DVD

Select the HDD or DVD.

DISC

NAVIGATOR

Open the Disc Navigator.

4 ENTER Play the highlighted title.

• You can also select Play from the command menu options.

Changing the display style of the

Disc Navigator

You can choose to display titles in the Disc

Navigator in various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the same time.

Disc Navigator (HDD)

10 1

4 Titles

Recent first

All Genres

HDD

10Titles

23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 4 SP

23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

2h00m(1.0G)

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

• You can also access the Disc Navigator from the Home Menu.

1 panel.

Display the View Options

The View Options panel

Style

Disc Navigator (HDD)

Sort order

Recent first

NEW first

Genre

All Genres

HDD

Remain

30h30m

10Titles

23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 4 SP

23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

2h00m(1.0G)

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

3 Browse the list of titles.

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.

• Use the PREV / NEXT buttons to display the previous/next page of titles.

• To change the thumbnail picture displayed for a title see Set Thumbnail on page 93.

• For HDD recordings, you should be able to see a thumbnail title digest. If it doesn’t display, set Set Preview to

Normal . See Set Preview on page 139.

ENTER

2 Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or

‘Genre’, then press ENTER to see the available view options.

• Style – Select four or eight titles per screen view

• Sort order – Sort by date (most recent first), unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest first)

• Genre – Display all genres or just a selected genre

ENTER

3 Choose a view option, then press ENTER.

The title list display is updated according to the new display preferences.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 79 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Playback

Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs

DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 DivX

HOME MENU

Display the Home Menu.

ENTER

2 Select ‘Disc Navigator’.

Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/MP3/DivX disc, you can press DISC

NAVIGATOR , which takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen.

1 During playback, start reverse or forward scanning.

• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.

2 Press repeatedly to change the scanning speed.

There are four scanning speeds available when playing HDD video, a DVD or a DivX title. Reverse playback is also possible with

HDD and DVD video.

There are two scanning speeds for other types of disc.

3 Resume normal playback.

ENTER

3 Select what you want to play.

Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly different, but they are all navigated in the same way.

The screen below shows a WMA/MP3/DivX disc. Navigate to the folder, or the track/title within a folder that you want to play.

Disc Navigator

WMA/MP3

Divx

Folder (01-03)

01.Rock

02.Pop

03.Dance

Track(001-004)

001.Intro

002.Escape

003.Everything You Say

004.What I Do

Playback starts after you press ENTER .

• For discs that contain CD-Audio tracks and WMA/MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you can switch the playback area between

CD , WMA/MP3 and DivX . This can only be done while the disc is stopped.

Scanning discs

Playing in slow motion

DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX

You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in either direction, while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles can only be played forwards in slow motion.

There is no sound when playing in slow motion.

PAUSE

Pause playback.

/ /

2 Press and hold to start slow motion reverse or forward play.

/ /

3 Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed.

The current playback speed is indicated onscreen.

4 Resume normal playback.

A L L (except WMA)

You can scan discs at various speeds, forwards or backwards.

Note

1 • No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles.

• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, DVDs and DivX, except on forward SCAN 1 .

• Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.

2 Reverse playback may not be smooth.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 80 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Playback

Frame advance/frame reverse

DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX

You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc

or the HDD frame-by-frame.

With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles, you can only use frame advance.

PAUSE

Pause playback.

/ /

2 Back up or advance one frame with each press.

• You can also do this by rotating the

Smart Jog .

3 Resume normal playback.

The Play Mode menu

A L L

The Play Mode menu gives you access to search functions, repeat and programme play functions.

•

HOME MENU

Select ‘Play Mode’ from the

Home Menu.

Play Mode

Search Mode

A-B Repeat

Repeat

Programme

Time Search

Title Search

Chapter Search

ENTER

1 Select ‘Search Mode’ from the

Play Mode menu, then choose a search option.

The available search options depend on the type of disc.

2 Enter a title/chapter/folder/ track number or a search time.

Play Mode

Search Mode

A-B Repeat

Repeat

Programme

Time Search

Title Search

Chapter Search

Input Time

0.01.00

Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes into the current title, press 2 , 5 , 0 , 0 .

For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1 , 1 , 5 , 2 , 0 .

Time Search (Video CD): For example, for

2 minutes and 30 seconds into the current track, press 2 , 3 , 0 .

Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6, press 6 .

3 ENTER Start playback.

A-B Repeat

DVD HDD CD Video CD DivX

The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is played over and over.

Search Mode

A L L

The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a specified point in a disc by time

or by title/chapter/folder/track number.

ENTER

1 During playback, select ‘A-B

Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.

Note

1 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached.

2 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.

3 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is cancelled.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 81 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Playback

2 ENTER With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press at the point you want the loop to start.

Play Mode

Search Mode

A-B Repeat

Repeat

Programme

A (Loop Start)

B (Loop End)

Off

ENTER

• Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play

Mode menu, then choose a repeat play mode.

Play Mode

Search Mode

A-B Repeat

Repeat

Programme

Repeat Title

Repeat Chapter

Repeat Off

3 ENTER With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press at the point you want the loop to end.

Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and plays the loop round and round.

• When playing a DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW

(Video mode), DVD+R/+RW, or from the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title.

• To resume normal playback, select Off from the A-B Repeat menu, or press

CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play

Mode menu) is displayed.

Repeat play

A L L

There are various repeat play options, depending on the kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together with programme play to repeat the tracks/ chapters in the programme list (see

Programme play below).

• To resume normal playback, select

Repeat Off from the Repeat Play menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed.

Programme play

HDD DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3

This feature lets you program the play order of titles/chapters

/folders/tracks on a disc or the HDD.

ENTER

1 Select ‘Programme’ from the

Play Mode menu, then ‘Input/Edit

Programme’.

The Input/Edit Programme screen varies according to the disc type. Below is the DVD input screen.

Programme

Step

01.001

02.

03.

04.

05.

06.

07.

08.

Title (01-03)

Title 01

Title 02

Title 03

Chapter(001-015)

Chapter 001

Chapter 002

Chapter 003

Chapter 004

Chapter 005

Chapter 006

Chapter 007

Chapter 008

ENTER

2 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the current step in the programme list.

Note

1 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is cancelled.

2 When playing a programme list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the programme list may be sometimes be played, depending on the disc.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 82 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Playback

After pressing ENTER to add the title/ chapter/folder/track, the step number automatically moves down one.

• To insert a step into the programme list, highlight the step number where you want to insert another step, then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After pressing ENTER , all the subsequent steps move down one.

• To delete a step from the programme list, highlight the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR .

3 Repeat step 2 to build up a programme list.

A programme list can contain up to 24 titles/ chapters/folders/tracks.

4 Play the programme list.

Programme play remains active until you cancel programme play, erase the programme list, eject the disc or switch off the recorder.

Tip

• To save your programme list and exit the programme edit screen without starting playback, press HOME MENU .

• During programme play, press

NEXT to skip to the next programme step.

• To repeat play the programme list, select

Programme Repeat from the Repeat

Play Mode menu (see Repeat play on page 81).

• Press CLEAR during playback to switch off programme play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is displayed). Press while stopped to erase the programme list.

• From the programme menu you can also:

Start Programme Play – Starts playback of a saved programme list

Cancel Programme Play – Turns off programme play, but does not erase the programme list

Erase Programme List – Erases the programme list and turns off programme play

Displaying and switching subtitles

DVD-Video DivX

Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle language during playback.

Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle options.

•

SUBTITLE

Select/change the subtitle language.

The current subtitle language is shown onscreen and in the front panel display.

• To switch off subtitles, press

SUBTITLE then CLEAR .

Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks

DVD-Video DivX

When playing a DVD disc or DivX title recorded with two or more soundtracks

(often in different languages), you can switch the soundtrack during playback.

Note

1 • Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access.

• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 134.

2 • Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access.

• To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 134.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 83 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Playback

Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack options.

•

AUDIO

Change the audio soundtrack.

The current audio language is shown onscreen and in the front panel display.

• The sound may drop out for a few seconds when switching soundtracks.

• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver on page 20 for connection details.

Switching audio channels

HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM

L+R – Both channels (default)

L – Left channel only

R – Right channel only

CD Video CD WMA/MP3

Stereo – Stereo (default)

1/L – Left channel only

2/R – Right channel only

Super VCD

1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1/Stereo (default)

1 L – Soundtrack 1/Left channel

1 R – Soundtrack 1/Right channel

2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2/Stereo

2 L – Soundtrack 2/Left channel

2 R – Soundtrack 2/Right channel

Switching camera angles

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD CD Video CD Super VCD

WMA/MP3

For HDD

and VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio, you can switch between left ( L ) channel, right ( R ) channel, or both

( L+R ).

When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel.

Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks.

With these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as well as individual channels in each.

•

AUDIO

Press repeatedly to display/switch the audio channel.

The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-screen.

DVD-Video

Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or more angles — check the disc box for details: it should be marked with a

icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.

When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles are available (this can be switched off if you prefer — see Angle

Indicator on page 137).

ANGLE

• Switch the camera angle.

• The angle number is displayed onscreen.

• If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the new angle.

Note

1 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off ( HDD Recording Format on page 136).

2 When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital PCM (see

Dolby Digital Out on page 133) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 84 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Playback

Displaying disc information on-screen

You can display various on-screen information about the disc loaded or the

HDD.

DISPLAY

• Display/change the on-screen information.

• Press once to show the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the status of just the currently selected playback/ recording device (HDD or removable disc).

• To hide the information display, press

DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears.

HDD and removable disc activity display

Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the

HDD/DVD button to switch between the two kinds of display.

The example displays below show highspeed copying from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.

Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)

HDD

Remain 10h35m

Stop

Hi-Speed Copy

HDD DVD

0h08m left

DVD-RW Video

Remain –h––m

Stop

HDD

Remain 10h35m

Chase Play

Rec

Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)

DVD-RW Video

Remain 0h52m

Stop

Recording time

Relative playback position

Shows recording restrictions for the current channel programme

Stop

DVD-RW VR

Original

Disc Name

Resume

XP (1h00m/DVD)

Finalized

: Comedy shows

Rem.

0h35m

ABC Pr 1

Stereo

Copy Once

DVD Mode

Indicates copy-protected material

Indicates a multi-angle scene

Play

DVD-R Video

Title Name

3–2 0. 00. 15

Chapter Time 0. 00. 21

Chapter Total 0h01m52s

4.32Mbps

: 21/11 Football match

Indicates the data transfer rate

Tip

• See Switching camera angles on page 83 for more on multi-angle scene switching.

• When using the simultaneous play and record feature, the display shows information for playback only.

• During real-time copy, the copy source playback information is displayed.

• The Video mode DVD-R/-RW displays become the same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.

• The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis is calculated based on a

12 cm/4.7 GB disc at the displayed record setting.

• Recording and playback times for TV recordings are approximately 0.1 % shorter than the actual time. This is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD.

• The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time display when the disc is paused.

• Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that the broadcast TV programme contains copy control information.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 85 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Playing and recording from a DV camcorder

Chapter 9

Playing and recording from a

DV camcorder

You can play back and record video from a

DV camcorder connected to the DV IN jack on the front panel of this recorder.

Important

• If you connect a second recorder using a

DV cable, you cannot control the second unit from this one.

• You can’t control this unit remotely from a component connected to the DV IN jack.

• The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will pause if the signal is interrupted during recording.

• If your source is copy-protected using

Copy Guard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 61 for more details.

Playing from a DV camcorder

1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack.

2 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you would like.

See DV Input on page 133 for more on this.

• Check also that the Audio In settings for

External Audio and Bilingual

Recording are as you want them (see

Audio In on page 132).

3 HOME MENU Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Video

Playback’ from the Home Menu.

4 Start playback on the camcorder.

Images from the camcorder should appear on your TV.

• To record the incoming video, press

HDD/DVD to select the HDD or a DVD for recording, then press REC . Press

STOP REC to finish recording.

If there is no signal from the device connected to the DV jack, or the signal is copy-protected, recording will pause. It will automatically restart once there is a recordable signal.

Recording from a DV camcorder

• The source signal must be DVC-SD format.

• You can’t record date and time information from DV cassette.

• During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will pause recording.

Recording will restart automatically when there is a recordable signal.

However, if there is more than two minutes of blank tape, this recorder will stop recording and the camcorder should stop (depending on the camcorder).

Copying from a DV source

Using the recorder’s remote, you can control both the camcorder and this recorder.

Important

• Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this recorder’s remote.

• For best results when recording from a

DV camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing the camcorder to the place you want to start recording from and setting the camcorder to play-pause.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 86 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Playing and recording from a DV camcorder

1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack.

Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.

REC MODE

Set the recording quality.

• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 64 for detailed information.

3 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you would like.

See DV Input on page 133 for more on this.

• Check also that the Audio In settings for

External Audio and Bilingual

Recording are as you want them (see

Audio In on page 132).

4 HOME MENU Select ‘DV’, then ‘Copy from a

DV Source’ from the Home Menu.

• DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape loaded.

ENTER

5 Select ‘Record to Hard Disk

Drive’ or ‘Record to DVD’.

6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you want to start recording from.

For best results, pause playback at the point from which you want to record.

• Depending on your camcorder, you can use this recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the , , , ,

, and buttons.

ENTER

Select ‘Start Rec’.

Control with these buttons

Stop

1.02.22

Stop

HDD

Rem.

Start Rec

Pause Rec

Stop Rec

SP (2h00m/DVD)

32h45m

• You can pause or stop the recording by selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display. You cannot control the camcorder from this remote control during recording.

• If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder, the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not be recorded.

Use the pause button on your camcorder instead and recording will start immediately.

• HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only:

A chapter marker is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode on the

DV tape. This happens when the recording is stopped or paused then restarted, for example.

• If you don’t want to see the DV recording screen during recording, press DISPLAY to hide it (press again to display).

• While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording screen using the HOME

MENU or RETURN/EXIT button.

DV Auto Copy

DV Auto Copy allows you to make an exact copy of the contents of a DV source to the

HDD or a DVD.

1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack.

Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.

REC MODE

Set the recording quality.

• See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 64 for detailed information.

3 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you require.

See DV Input on page 133 for more on this.

• Check also that the Audio In settings for

External Audio and Bilingual

Recording are as you want them (see

Audio In on page 132).

HOME MENU

Select ‘DV’, then ‘DV Auto

Copy’ from the Home Menu.

• DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape loaded.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 87 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Playing and recording from a DV camcorder

ENTER

5 Select ‘Record to Hard Disk

Drive’ or ‘Record to DVD’.

The DV tape is rewound to the beginning.

Once it is rewound, the DV tape is played from the beginning and copied to either the

HDD or a DVD.

• If there is a gap of two minutes or more between recorded contents, the copying process is automatically stopped.

• Once copying is finished, the DV tape is automatically rewound.

• To cancel the copying process, press

STOP REC for more than three seconds.

About automatic finalization

If you use a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or

DVD+R/+RW disc for copying, it will automatically be finalized after copying is complete.

• You can’t customize the background for

DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW disc finalization.

• No title names are assigned.

• If you want to give the disc a name, please do so before you start the copy

(see Input Disc Name on page 121).

• If a timer recording is scheduled to start, and in some other instances, the disc will not be finalized.

Frequently Asked Questions

• I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!

Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also make sure that what you’re trying to record is not copyprotected.

If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder then switch back on.

• There’s a picture, but no sound!

Try switching the DV Input setting (see

DV Input on page 133) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 .

About DV

Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394-

1995, you can connect a DV camcorder to this recorder using a DV cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals.

“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks.

• This recorder is only compatible with DVformat (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.

• You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at a time to this recorder.

• You cannot control this recorder from external equipment connected via the

DV IN jack.

• It may not always be possible to control the connected camcorder via the DV IN jack.

• DV camcorders can usually record audio as stereo 16-bit/48 kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/32 kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see DV

Input on page 133).

• Audio input to the DV IN jack should be

32 kHz or 48 kHz (not 44.1 kHz).

• Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the source component pauses playback or plays an unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the source component, or the DV cable is disconnected.

• The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output functionality.

Note

1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting (page 132).

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 88 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Editing

Chapter 10

Editing

Editing options

The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types.

HDD

DVD-R/-RW

(Video mode),

DVD+R/+RW

DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM

(VR mode)

Original Play List

Create (page 90)

Play (page 90)

Erase (page 90)

Edit > Title Name (page 91)

Edit > Set Thumbnail

(page 93)

Edit > Erase Section

(page 93)

Edit > Divide (page 94)

Edit > Chapter Edit

(page 94)

Edit > Set Genre (page 95)

Edit > Lock (page 96)

Edit > Move (page 96)

Edit > Combine (page 97)

Genre Name (page 97)

Multi-Mode (page 98)

Undo (page 99)

*1 DVD-R/-RW only

*1 *1

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 89 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Editing

The Disc Navigator screen

The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) discs, DVD+R/

+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as video content on the hard disk drive.

Important

• Titles that have been recorded with a

Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank thumbnail image. See also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 141.

• During recording, if you display the Disc

Navigator for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a mark. These titles were recorded with a Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder. During recording, these titles cannot be played.

HDD/DVD

Select the HDD or DVD.

DISC

NAVIGATOR

Display the Disc Navigator screen.

Playback will automatically stop when you do this.

• The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home Menu.

View options panel Title list

Available recording time

Disc Navigator (HDD)

4 Titles

Recent first

All Genres

23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 4 SP

23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP

10Titles

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

2h00m(1.0G)

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

Selected title

Title thumbnail Title information Command menu panel

• Press to display the command menu panel. Use the

and ENTER buttons to navigate the menus.

PREV NEXT

• When in the title list, press to display the previous/next page if there are more titles than can be displayed.

DISPLAY

• Press to change the title information displayed in the title list.

HDD/DVD

• Press to switch between the HDD and DVD Disc Navigator screens.

• If you are editing a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc you can display the Play List by selecting Play List from the view options panel (press , then select Play List from the view options, then Play List ).

Disc Navigator (DVD)

Style

PlayList

11/29 MON 7:00PM

11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP

10Titles

20:00 FRI 3/12

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

2h00m(1.0G) MENU

• Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are recently recorded titles that haven’t yet been played.

DISC

NAVIGATOR

Press to exit the Disc Navigator.

Editing accuracy

Some editing commands ask you whether you want to keep Video mode compatibility or frame accuracy ( Video Mode Compatible

Editing or Frame Accurate Editing ).

Frame Accurate Editing is very precise. The edit point is accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use the high-speed copy function to make a

DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.

Video Mode Compatible Editing is less precise. The edit point you choose will only be accurate to within one-half to one second.

On the other hand, these edit points will be preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or

DVD+R/+RW.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 90 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Editing

HDD genres

The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize your HDD video content you can assign different genres to titles. There are 20 genres in total, including five user-definable ones that you can name as you like.

Create

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only

Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it.

Before you can use this command, make sure that the Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the left.

Play

DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

Use this function to start playback of a title.

1 Highlight the title you want to play.

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.

ENTER

1 Select ‘Create’ from the command menu panel.

Disc Navigator (DVD)

4 Titles

Play List

No title

0Titles

Play

Edit

2h00m(1.0G)

Create

ENTER

2 Select ‘Play’ from the command menu panel.

Playback of the title you selected starts.

Disc Navigator (HDD)

10 1

4 Titles

Recent first

All Genres

HDD

Remain

30h30m

11/29 MON 7:00PM

11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP

Erase

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP

Edit

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

10Titles

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

DVD

VR Mode

Remain

0h30m

ENTER

2 Select an original title to add to the Play List.

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.

Repeat these two steps to add as many titles as necessary to the Play List.

Erase

DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

Use this function to erase unwanted titles.

When you erase titles from the HDD or

Original titles from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a DVD-RW

(Video mode) or DVD+RW disc increases the available recording time only if it is the last title on the disc.

Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a

DVD-R (VR mode or Video mode) or DVD+R, will not result in any more free space on the disc.

Note

1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 91 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Editing

1 Highlight the title you want to erase.

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.

ENTER

2 Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu panel.

3 title.

ENTER

Input a name for the selected

Input Title Name

23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP

CAPS small

A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? !

N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ;

A A A A A A Æ

E E E E I I I I

D N O O O O O ø

U U U U Y ß $ %

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 c

+ – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ

_ &

£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ®

2 3 ´

µ ¸ –

÷ x

¿ `

OK Clear Space

ENTER

3 to cancel.

Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’

Tip

• You can erase a title quickly by pressing

CLEAR when the title is highlighted.

Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER .

Title Name

DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long for VR mode, DVD-RAM and

HDD recordings, and up to 40 characters for

Video mode recordings and DVD+R/+RW discs.

• A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the

buttons to change the cursor position.

• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-case, or use the

CASE SELECTION buttons (

NEXT ).

PREV /

• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 92.

• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set.

1 Highlight the title you want to name (or rename).

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.

ENTER

4 Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.

• To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN/EXIT .

ENTER

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’ from the command menu panel.

Disc Navigator (HDD)

10 1

4 Titles

Recent first

All Genres

HDD

Remain

30h30m

10Titles

11/29 MON 7:00PM

11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP

Set Thumbnail

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

Edit

2h00m(1.0G)

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 92 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Editing

Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name

The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts that you can use to input characters in the name input screen.

Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the characters shown.

If you want to enter two characters in succession that are both on the same button

(for example a P and an R ), press to advance the cursor one space manually between inputting the two characters.

Key Characters Key Characters

1 . , ’ ? ! – & 1 6 m n o 6 ö ô ò ó

ø ñ

2 a b c 2 ä à á â ã

æ ç

7 p q r s 7 $

ÿ/ß

4 d e f 3 è é ë ê g h i 4 î ï ì í ¡

9 t u v 8 ü ù û ú w x y z 9

5 j k l 5 £ 0 0

[cursor back] [cursor forward]

/ [change case] CLEAR [clear character]

<space> [finish name input]

+ ~

( ) _ / : ; ” ` ^ @ # ∗ % ¥ | + =

{ } [ ] < >

*1 lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß

Using a USB keyboard to enter a name

Using a USB keyboard connected to this recorder makes entering names very quick and convenient.

When in USB keyboard input mode, a USB icon ( ) appears in the lower-left of the screen.

Other than the standard alpha-numeric keys, use the following keys when entering names:

Key Function

Change the cursor position

F2 delete back space enter esc

Select CAPS

Select small

Delete character at the current cursor position

Delete the character at the previous cursor position

Enter the name

Exit the input screen

Note

1 • It’s possible that some USB keyboards will not work exactly as expected when connected to this recorder. See also Connecting a USB device on page 22 for more connection information.

• Certain keyboards may not be able to correctly input all characters.

2 If you use the remote control to enter a name when in the USB keyboard input mode, the recorder will automatically switch to remote control input mode. Press any key on the USB keyboard to return to USB keyboard input mode.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 93 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Editing

Set Thumbnail

HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM

You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in that title.

Erase Section

HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM

Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV.

1 Highlight the title you want to change the thumbnail picture for.

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.

1 Highlight the title containing the section you want to erase.

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.

ENTER

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the command menu panel.

The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you can find the frame you want.

ENTER

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’ from the command menu panel.

Disc Navigator (HDD)

10 1

11/29 MON 7:00PM

11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP

10Titles

4 Titles

Recent first

All Genres

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP

Edit

Divide

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

2h00m(1.0G)

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

HDD

Remain

30h30m

3 Use the playback controls ( , ,

, etc.) to find a suitable frame, then

, press ENTER to set.

Set Thumbnail (HDD)

23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP

Rec. time 2h00m

10-1 00.00.09.15

Play Pause

Exit

You can also use the chapter and time search features (press the YELLOW button), and the Smart Jog (for CM SKIP and CM

BACK ).

3 edit.

ENTER

HDD only: Select the type of

HDD/DVD RECORDER

Please select the type of editing.

Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying.

Video Mode Compatible Editing

Frame Accurate Editing

• For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 89.

4 Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls ( , , , , etc.) to find the start of the section to erase, then press ENTER.

The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER , a marker shows the start of the section.

Erase Section (HDD)

23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP

Rec. time 2h00m

10-1 00.00.09.15

Play Pause

4 Select ‘Exit’ to return to the

Edit screen.

From

Exit

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 94 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Editing

ENTER

5 Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then press ENTER.

After pressing ENTER , another marker indicates the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red.

4 Use the playback controls ( , ,

, etc.) to find the place you want to

, divide the title.

Divide Title (HDD)

23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP

Rec. time 2h00m

10–1 00.00.09.15

Play Pause

ENTER

6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel.

In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look.

• When editing VR mode Original content, you may not be able to erase very short sections (less than five seconds).

Divide

HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only

Use this command to divide a title into two.

Note that once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be recombined into one again.

ENTER

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from the command menu panel.

3 HDD only: Select the type of edit.

HDD/DVD RECORDER

Please select the type of editing.

Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying.

Divide

Cancel

5 ENTER Press to divide the title at the current playback position.

ENTER

6 to cancel.

Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’

Divided titles cannot be combined.

OK?

Yes No

1 Highlight the title you want to divide.

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.

Chapter Edit

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD

When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you can edit individual chapters within a title, with commands for erasing, combining and dividing.

1 Highlight the title that contains the chapters you want to edit.

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.

ENTER

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’ from the command menu panel.

Video Mode Compatible Editing

Frame Accurate Editing

• For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 89.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 95 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Editing

3 edit.

ENTER

HDD only: Select the type of

HDD/DVD RECORDER

Please select the type of editing.

Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying.

Video Mode Compatible Editing

Frame Accurate Editing

• For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 89.

4 Select the command you want:

• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or

( more parts: Use the playback controls

, , , , etc.) to find the point at which you want to divide the chapter, then press ENTER .

Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

Rec. time

Chapters

1h00m

1–1

Play

0.00.00

Exit

Divide

Erase/Move

Combine

You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM disc or

99 chapters per HDD title).

• Erase

/Move

– Erase or move chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER . Select whether you want to erase or move the chapter.

Move command only: Select the destination for the chapter, and press

ENTER .

Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)

001 002

Rec. time

Chapter

003

Move

0h01m

Cancel

004 005

Exit

Divide

Erase/Move

Combine

• Combine

– Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER .

Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

Rec. time 1h00m

2 3 4 5

Exit

Divide

Erase/Move

Combine

ENTER

5 Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Disc Navigator screen.

Set Genre

HDD

Use this command to assign a genre to a title.

1 Highlight the title you want to assign a genre to.

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.

Note

1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.

2 VR mode Play List only.

3 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 96 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Editing

ENTER

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from the command menu panel.

Disc Navigator (HDD)

10 1

4 Titles

Recent first

All Genres

HDD

Remain

30h30m

11/29 MON 7:00PM

11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP

10Titles

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP

Edit

Divide

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

2h00m(1.0G)

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

ENTER

Select a genre for the title.

Disc Navigator (HDD)

10 1

4 Titles

Recent first

All Genres

HDD

Remain

30h30m

23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 4 SP

23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP

10Titles

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

2h00m(1.0G)

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

ENTER

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the command menu panel.

Disc Navigator (HDD)

10 1

11/29 MON 7:00PM

11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP

10Titles

4 Titles

Recent first

All Genres

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP

Edit

Divide

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

2h00m(1.0G)

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

HDD

Remain

30h30m

An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator with a padlock icon.

Move

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only

Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play List titles.

Lock

HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM

Original only

You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock it later.

Important

• You can’t undo any edits made before changing the lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock command using the

Undo option from the Disc Navigator menu.

1 Highlight the title you want to lock

(or unlock).

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.

1 Highlight the title you want to move.

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.

ENTER

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the command menu panel.

Disc Navigator (DVD)

4 Titles

10Titles

20:00 FRI 3/12 SP

Play

Title Name

Set Thumbnail

Play List

DVD

VR Mode

Remain

0h30m

22:00 THU 2/12 7 SP

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 7 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

19:00 MON 29/11

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 97 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Editing

ENTER

3 title.

Select a new position for the

Title to move

Disc Navigator (DVD)

11/29 MON 7:00PM

11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP

10Titles

4 Titles

Play List

20:00 FRI 3/12

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

2h00m(1.0G)

22:00 THU 2/12

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

19:00 MON 29/11

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

DVD

VR Mode

Remain

0h30m

Insert position

After pressing ENTER , the new, updated Play

List is displayed.

Combine

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only

Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one.

ENTER

3 Select another title to combine with the first.

This title will be appended to the first title selected.

The screen below shows title 3 selected to be appended to title 1.

Disc Navigator (DVD)

1 1

4 Titles

Play List

DVD

VR Mode

Remain

0h30m

10Titles

23:00 FRI 3/12

2h00m(1.0G)

20:00 FRI 3/12

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

2h00m(1.0G)

22:00 THU 2/12

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

19:00 MON 29/11

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

ENTER

4 to cancel.

Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’

OK to combine titles

1 and 3 ?

Yes No

1 Highlight the title you want to combine.

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.

This title will remain in the same place after combining with another title.

Genre Name

HDD

Use this command to rename one of the five user-definable genres ( Free 1 to Free 5 ).

ENTER

2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from the command menu panel.

Disc Navigator (DVD)

1 1

4 Titles

Play List

DVD

VR Mode

10Titles

11/29 MON 7:00PM

11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP

20:00 FRI 3/12 SP

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 7 SP SP

22:00 THU 2/12 SP

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP SP

1h00m(1.0G)

19:00 MON 29/11

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

ENTER

1 Select ‘Genre Name’ from the command menu panel.

Disc Navigator (HDD)

10Titles

4 Titles

Recent first

All Genres

HDD

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP

Edit

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

0G)

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 98 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Editing

ENTER

2 Select one of the userdefinable genre names.

Disc Navigator (HDD)

10 1

4 Titles

Recent first

All Genres

HDD

Remain

30h30m

11/29 MON 7:00PM

11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch SP

10Titles

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

Edit

Free4

Free5

2h00m(1.0G)

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

Multi-Mode

HDD

Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at once, for example.

ENTER

3 Input a name for the genre.

• The name can be up to 12 characters long.

• For information on remote control key short cuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 92.

Input Genre Name

Free 1

CAPS small

A B C D E F G H I J K L M . , ? !

N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ( ) : ;

A A A A A A Æ

E E E E I I I I

D N O O O O O ø

U U U U Y ß $ %

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

+ – / @ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ±

_ c

< = > _ &

£ \ § ¨ © ¬ – ®

3 ´

µ ¸ – /

3 /

¿ `

Clear Space

ENTER

1 Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the command menu panel.

Disc Navigator (HDD)

10 1

4 Titles

Recent first

All Genres

HDD

Remain

30h30m

23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 4 SP

23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP

Play

Erase

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

Edit

10Titles

22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

ENTER

2 Select titles from the title list.

Selected titles are marked with a .

• You can also use the Smart Jog to select titles.

ENTER

4 and exit.

Select ‘OK’ to enter the name

ENTER

3 Select the command that you want applied to all the marked titles.

For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles.

Disc Navigator (HDD)

10 1

Multi-Mode 10Titles

23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP

4 Titles

Recent first

20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP Change Genre

20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP

2h00m(1.0G)

All Genres

HDD

Remain

30h30m

22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP

19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(1.0G)

Once the command is completed, Multi-

Mode is automatically exited.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 99 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Editing

Undo

DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW

If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally undo it. There is one level of undo

(in other words, you can only undo the last edit you made).

ENTER

• Select ‘Undo’ from the command menu panel.

• You can’t undo anything after exiting the

Disc Navigator screen.

Disc Navigator (DVD)

4 Titles

11/29 MON 7:00PM

No title

Play List

0Titles

Edit

2h00m(1.0G)

Create

DVD

VR Mode

Remain

0h30m

Frequently asked questions

• Why doesn’t the available recording time increase when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R?

When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or

DVD+R), the titles are no longer displayed, but the content remains on the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once media; they can’t be erased or rewritten.

• I can’t edit my disc!

You may find that as the available recording time is reduced on a VR mode

DVD-R disc, editing is no longer possible. This is because information about your edits requires a certain amount of disc space. As you edit, this information builds up, eventually preventing you from editing further.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 100 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Copying and backup

Chapter 11

Copying and backup

Introduction

Use the copying features of this recorder to:

• Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to a DVD.

• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the

HDD to play in another player.

• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.

• Transfer edited video from the HDD to

DVD.

The simplest way to copy a title is to use the

One Touch Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy below for detailed instructions.

For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 102 for detailed instructions.

Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be as fast as one minute per hour of video. See

Minimum copying times on page 144 for more on copying times.

If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is always done in real-time.

When real-time copying from the HDD to a

DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the original material are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at intervals, according to the Auto

Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter

(Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 136).

Restrictions on copying

Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected using Copy Guard. These discs cannot be copied to the HDD.

Some video material is copy-once protected.

This means that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a

CPRM ver. 1.1 or higher VR mode DVD-RW, ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode DVD-R, or CPRMcompatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM on page 61 for more on this). Only one instance of a copy-once protected title can be added to the Copy List, and after it’s been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy-once protected).

You can identify copy-once protected material during playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark

( !

) is shown.

Copyright

Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy.

Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners.

One Touch Copy

* See also Copyright above.

The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing or selected (in the Disc

Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to

HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of where in the title you start the copy.

100

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 101 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Copying and backup

HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording mode. When copying DVD to

HDD, the copy is made in whatever recording mode is currently set.

Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is loaded when trying to copy from the HDD.

REC MODE

1 If you’re copying from DVD to the

HDD, select a recording mode.

Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title playing will not result in a better quality recording.

ONE TOUCH

COPY

2 Press during playback to copy the current title.

The front panel display indicates that the title is being copied.

• High-speed copying is used when copying from the HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying.

• Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the title.

Cancelling One Touch Copy

You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.

ONE TOUCH

COPY

• second.

Press and hold for more than a

Copying is cancelled and the video already copied is erased.

• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/+R copy, the space available for recording does not return to the pre-copy figure.

Notes on copying using One Touch

Copy

characters of a name are copied.

• The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same positions as the original when recording on to a DVD-R/

-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.

• You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.

• A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Use a DVD-R/

-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material.

• Low resolution ( SEP through LP modes

) widescreen material can’t be copied to a

DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/

+RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or

DVD-RAM disc for this type of material.

• When HDD Recording Format is set to

Video Mode Off, titles recorded in LP /

MN9 to MN15 modes cannot be highspeed copied to a DVD-R/

-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW.

Please use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or

DVD-RAM.

• Recordings of bilingual broadcasts cannot be high-speed copied to a

DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/

+RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM.

• XP+ titles cannot be copied to DVD via

One Touch Copy.

• Titles over eight hours cannot be copied to single-layer DVD+R/+RW discs using

One Touch Copy. Use DVD+R DL discs for titles over eight hours.

• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6 , SEP , SLP or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/

+RW using One Touch Copy.

Copying to DVD

• Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail picture markers for the Disc

Navigator, are also copied. However, if you copy to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, only the first 40

Copying to the HDD

• The maximum title length for copying is

12 hours.

• Title name and chapter markers are also copied, except when copying from a finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW.

Note

1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).

101

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 102 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Copying and backup

• Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in the copy may be slightly changed from the original.

• If some part of the title being copied is copy-protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected portions will not be copied.

HOME MENU

Menu.

Select ‘Copy’ from the Home

ENTER

Select ‘HDD DVD’.

Using Copy Lists

* See also Copyright on page 100.

At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of

HDD or DVD titles that you want to copy.

When copying HDD titles to DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list, erasing chapters you don’t need, or renaming titles, for example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not affect the actual video content; only the ‘virtual’ content of the

Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the actual content is not being altered.

Copying from HDD to DVD

HDD DVD

DVD/CD HDD

Disc Back-up

• If this is the first time to create a Copy

List, skip to step 5 below.

4 If there is already a Copy List stored in the recorder, choose whether to

‘Create New Copy List’ or ‘Continue

Using Previous Copy List’.

Continue Using Previous Copy List

Create New Copy List

• If you select Continue Using Previous

Copy List , skip to step 10 below.

• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy List already stored in the recorder.

102

Important

• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.

• The Copy List is erased if the Input Line

System setting is changed (see

Additional information about the TV system settings on page 141).

• Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 157) will erase the Copy List.

1 Load a recordable DVD.

• It is possible to complete the following steps without having a recordable DVD loaded (or having an uninitialized DVD loaded); however, the steps are slightly different.

• If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode) disc for the copy, make sure it is initialized before you start.

ENTER

5 Add titles to the Copy List

(highlight a title and press ENTER to add).

Copy

Select Title

Recent first

All Genres

HDD DVD (Video mode)

1 > 2 > 3

WED 29/03 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP

MON 27/03 21:00 Mon 27/03 Pr 4 SP

S A T 25/03 23:00 S a t 25/03 Pr 9 SP

THU 23/03 22:00 Thu 23/03 Pr 6 SP

WED 22/03 20:00 Wed 22/03 Pr 2 SP

MON 20/03 13:00 Mon 20/03 Pr 9 SP

F R I 17/03 21:00 F r i 17/03 Pr 4 SP

WED 15/03 20:00 Wed 15/03 Pr 2 SP

8 Title

Pr 2

Pr 4

Pr 9

Pr 6

Pr 2

Pr 9

Pr 4

Pr 2

20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP

20:00 1h00m(2.0G) Pr 2

Sports SP

Back

Copy List Total

Current DVD Remain

0.0G

4.3G

Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink.

There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to the Copy List if you are copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/

+RW:

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 103 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Copying and backup

• When adding titles that contain copyonce protected material, the copy-once parts will not be added.

• When adding titles that contain material of more than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title if high-speed copying is possible.

Depending on the title

, high-speed copying may not be possible to DVDs.

6 Press to display the command menu panel.

The Command Menu panel

Copy

Select Title

Recent first

All Genres

HDD DVD (Video mode)

1 > 2 > 3

8 Title

WED 29/03 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP Pr 2

MON 27/03 21:00 Mon 27/03 Pr 4 SP Pr 4

S A T 25/03 23:00 S a t 25/03 Pr 9 SP Pr 9

THU 23/03 22:00 Thu 23/03 Pr 6 SP Pr 6

WED 22/03 20:00 Wed 22/03 Pr 2 SP Pr 2

MON 20/03 13:00 Mon 20/03 Pr 9 SP Pr 9

F R I 17/03 21:00 F r i 17/03 Pr 4 SP Pr 4

WED 15/03 20:00 Wed 15/03 Pr 2 SP Pr 2

Back

20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP

20:00 1h00m(2.0G) Pr 2

Sports SP

Copy List Total

Current DVD Remain

4.3G

7 Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title

Edit screen.

Copy

Title Edit

HDD DVD (Video mode)

1 > 2 > 3

2 20:00 Wed 22/03 Pr 2 SP

2 Title

Back

20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(2.0G)

Copy List Total

Current DVD Remain

4.3G

8 To edit a title, highlight it using the

buttons, then press ENTER.

Copy

Title Edit

HDD DVD (Video mode)

1 > 2 > 3

2 Title

Erase Section

Move

Preview

Cancel

20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(2.0G)

Copy List Total

Current DVD Remain

4.3G

Back

A menu of editing commands appears:

• Erase – Erase individual titles from the

Copy List (see Erase on page 90).

• Title Name – Name or rename a title in the Copy List (see Title Name on page 91).

• Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see

Erase Section on page 93).

• Move – Change the order of titles in the

Copy List (see Move on page 96).

• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List.

• Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see Divide on page 94).

• Combine – Combine two titles in the

Copy List into one (see Combine on page 97).

• Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a

Copy List title (see Chapter Edit on page 94):

• Divide – Divide a chapter into two.

• Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/

Change the chapter order.

• Combine – Combine two chapters into one.

Note

1 The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD+R/+RW:

• Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6 , SEP , SLP or EP mode.

The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD-R/-RW (Video Mode) and DVD+R/+RW:

• Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution ( SEP through LP / MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8

(Video Mode On)).

• LP / MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off.

• Bilingual recordings.

• Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.

The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for any types of DVD:

• XP+ titles.

103

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 104 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Copying and backup

• Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail frame for a title (see Set Thumbnail on page 93).

• Recording Mode – Set the picture quality of the copy (see Recording Mode on page 105).

• Bilingual – Set how bilingual audio should be copied when copying from

HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and

DVD+R/+RW (see Bilingual on page 106).

• Cancel – Exit the menu.

Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need editing.

9 panel.

Display the command menu

ENTER

Select ‘Next’ to proceed.

2 Title Copy

Title Edit

HDD DVD (Video mode)

1 > 2 > 3

20:00 Wed 29/03 Pr 2 SP

20:00 Wed 22/03 Pr 2 SP

Back

20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP

1h00m(2.0G)

Copy List Total

Current DVD Remain

4.3G

There are several options available from the next screen:

• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the recording quality (see

Recording Mode on page 105).

• Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a VR mode disc or

40 characters for a Video mode disc or

DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is similar to that of naming titles; see Title

Name on page 91.)

• Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a DVD-R/-RW

(Video mode) or DVD+R after copying.

Select a title menu style from the following screen.

ENTER

11 copying.

Select ‘Start Copy’ to start

Copy

Start Copy

HDD

HDD DVD (Video Mode)

1 > 2 > 3

DVD-RW

Video Mode

Copy Time 0h 16m

Recording Mode

Disc Name

High-Speed

Finalize

Copy List Total

Current DVD Remain

Off

4.3G

Back

Recording Mode

Input Disc Name

Finalize

Start Copy

• If you’re using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc and the copy will span both layers, the Copy List Total bar will be purple.

• The Current DVD Remain bar will be half-length if the first layer of a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc is already full.

Copying from DVD to HDD

Important

• The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t accessible when a finalized Video mode

DVD-R/-RW or a DVD-Video is loaded. As long as the disc is not Copy Guard protected, you can still use the One

Touch Copy function, however (See One

Touch Copy on page 100).

• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.

• The Copy List will be erased if:

– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or edited.

– the disc tray is opened.

– playback is switched between Play List and Original.

– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized.

104

Note

1 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 105 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Copying and backup

– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 157).

• It may not be possible to copy from a

DVD disc that was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC.

HOME MENU

Menu.

Select ‘Copy’ from the Home

Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need editing.

ENTER

7 Select ‘Next’ from the command menu panel to proceed to the copy options screen.

• Select Recording Mode if you want to change the recording quality (see

Recording Mode below).

ENTER

2 Select ‘DVD/CD HDD’.

ENTER

3 Select a Copy List type.

• Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy List already stored in the recorder.

ENTER

8 copying.

Select ‘Start Copy’ to start

Recording Mode

ENTER

Add titles to the Copy List

(highlight a title and press ENTER to add).

Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink.

5 Select ‘Next’ from the command menu panel to proceed to the title edit screen.

ENTER

6 Select a title to edit.

A menu appears of Copy List editing commands:

• Erase – Erase individual titles from the

Copy List (see Erase on page 90).

• Move – Change the order of titles in the

Copy List (see Move on page 96).

• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List.

• Cancel – Exit the menu.

ENTER

Select ‘Recording Mode’ from the command menu panel.

ENTER

2 Select a recording mode for the copy.

• High-Speed Copy

– The Copy List is copied at the same recording quality as the original.

• XP , SP , LP , EP , SLP , SEP , MN

– The Copy

List is copied at the specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than the original, the copy will not be better quality than the original.)

If you select

MN32

, LPCM

above, you can also change the level setting ( or XP+

MN1 to

) from the

Recording Quality box that appears.

Note

1 When copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as the original.

2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter

(DVD+R/+RW) on page 136).

3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available.

4 XP+ mode available only when copying to HDD.

105

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 106 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Copying and backup

• Optimized

1,2

– The recording quality is automatically adjusted so that the Copy

List fits on to the space available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real-time.

When you change the recording mode setting, you can see how much disc space it will require. If this is more than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able to start copying. In this case, either change the recording quality, or press RETURN/EXIT to go back to the Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.

Bilingual

1 Select the title containing the audio you want to change.

ENTER

2 Select ‘Bilingual’ from the command menu panel.

ENTER

3 option.

Select a bilingual audio

ENTER

Select a backup option.

Start new disc back-up

Resume writing data

Erase back-up data

There are three backup options:

• Start new disc back-up – Start making a backup of a disc.

• Resume writing data – Record the backup data already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.

• Erase back-up data – Erase the backup data on the HDD.

3 Load the disc you want to make a backup of.

You can only make backup copies of finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs, finalized DVD+R or DVD+RW discs

(excluding DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs).

Disc Back-up

No disc.

Please load a disc to be backed-up.

Start Cancel

Using disc backup

* See also Copyright on page 100.

This feature offers a simple way to make a backup copy of finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) discs or DVD+R/+RW discs. The data is copied first to the hard disk drive

, then on to another recordable DVD disc.

HOME MENU

Select ‘Copy’, then ‘Disc backup’ from the Home Menu.

ENTER

Select ‘Start’.

Disc Back-up

Read from disc and save to HDD.

Start reading?

Start Cancel

• To see the progress of the backup, press

DISPLAY .

106

Note

1 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW ( Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter

(DVD+R/+RW) on page 136).

2 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD. Due to remaining space on the disc or the title that you copy, this mode does not always exactly fill a disc.

3 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 107 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Copying and backup

• You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second.

5 When the data has been copied, take out the disc and load a blank* recordable

DVD.

* If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the disc doesn’t have to be blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be erased in the backup process.

Disc Back-up

Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.

Please eject the disc and load a recordable disc

Start Cancel

You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2 disc, or DVD-RW ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the backup.

• If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot undo the finalization later.

• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may be cases where the contents of the disc you’re backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If this happens, please try another brand of disc.

• DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up to DVD-R/-RW discs; DVD+R/+RW discs can only be backed up to DVD+R/

+RW discs.

6 Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data to the blank disc.

Disc Back-up

Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.

The disc contents will be overwritten.

OK to start?

Start Cancel

• To see the progress of the backup, press

DISPLAY .

• You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However, this will make the disc unusable (although if you are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc you can re-initialize it in order to make it usable again — see Initializing recordable

DVD discs on page 72.)

7 After the recorder has finished recording the backup disc, you can select whether to make another backup of the same data or exit.

Disc Back-up

Disc back-up finished.

To make another back-up copy, please load a recordable disc.

Start Cancel

• Select Start to make another backup copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to make another backup copy, return to step 6 above.

8 If you don’t need to keep the backup data on the HDD, you can delete it now.

Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).

Disc Back-up

The backed-up data is still on the HDD.

Erasing it will increase the free space available. OK to Erase?

Yes No

• If you decide to leave the backup data on the HDD, you can make backup copies to recordable DVD discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.

107

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 108 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the Jukebox

Chapter 12

Using the Jukebox

The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorder’s HDD to store and playback music from up to 999 of your CDs. You can also transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CD-R/

-RW/-ROM, DVD, USB device or PC. Once on the HDD, you can name albums and tracks, assign them a genre, and set tracks that you don’t want to play to Jump.

Copying music to the HDD

The first step is to copy some music to the

HDD. CD audio, WMA and MP3 files are copied at high speed. All tracks are copied from each CD/DVD as an album.

WMA/MP3 album and track names are copied along with the audio. CD album and track names are not copied, but you can add these later (see Editing Jukebox albums on page 112).

Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in the order they appear on the CD/DVD.

Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot be copied to a recordable DVD disc.

ENTER

3 Select ‘DVD/CD to HDD’.

On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the

CD or all WMA/MP3 files on the DVD are copied to the HDD.

• You can also start copying by starting playback of the CD/DVD and then pressing ONE TOUCH COPY .

• To cancel copying press ENTER .

• If the CD loaded contains both CD audio tracks and WMA/MP3 files, the part currently selected will play.

Copying files via USB

Connecting a regular USB device

You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a connected USB device, such as a USB drive, to the HDD.

1 Connect the USB device.

HOME MENU

Menu.

Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home

Important

• While copying, no other recorder operation is possible.

• When copying, scheduled timer recordings will not start until copying is complete.

• Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully.

1 Load the CD/DVD you want to copy to the HDD.

HOME MENU

Menu.

Select ‘Copy’ from the Home

ENTER

3 Select ‘Listen to Music from

USB Device’.

ENTER

4 Select ‘Copy Album’ from the command menu panel.

ENTER

5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.

The selected folder on the USB device will be copied to the HDD.

108

Note

1 • Up to 999 albums can be created in the Jukebox. If you copy via Connect PC, the total number of albums you are able to create may be less than 999 (for more information, see page 110).

• Sound quality is not worsened when you copy data from another source.

• When playing back an album copied from a source whose original audio track plays continuously (such as a live recording), there will be a brief pause in sound between tracks.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 109 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the Jukebox

• Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB device can be copied/displayed.

Connect PC

Using a USB connection, you can copy

WMA and MP3 files from a PC to the HDD of this device. Operations carried out on the PC require Windows Media Player 10.

HOME MENU

Menu.

Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home

ENTER

Select ‘Connect PC’.

Important

• If the PC you are using does not currently have Windows Media Player 10 installed, you must first install the program and make sure it functions correctly before connecting the USB cable and attempting to use the Connect PC function.

• For more information on Connect PC, see Using a PC on page 23.

• You cannot edit or delete albums from this device when it is connected to a PC via USB. If you wish to edit or delete albums via the Jukebox, you must first disconnect the USB cable.

1 Connect the PC via USB cable.

The screen below is displayed. Choose ‘Take no action’ and click ‘OK’.

*Depending on the settings for Windows

Media Player 10, the screen shown below may not be displayed.

'Take no action'

ENTER

4 to cancel.

Status

Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’

5 Verify that the import screen is displayed on the device.

If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes, the import screen is automatically closed. To reopen it, you will have to repeat steps 2 through 4 .

Number of copied folders

Connect PC

Standby

000 Folders ( 000 error )

000000 Files ( 000 error )

Number of files unable to be copied

Exit

Number of copied files

6 Open Windows Media Player 10 on the PC.

The device settings screen appears. Click

‘Cancel’.

*Depending on the settings for Windows

Media Player 10, the screen shown below may not be displayed.

'OK' 'Cancel' 109

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 110 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the Jukebox

From the PC, in Windows Media Player 10:

1. Click ‘Library’.

2. Choose the artist, album or song you would like to copy, and press the right mouse button.

3. Click ‘Add to Sync list’ (when choosing songs, click ‘Add to’ then

‘Sync list’).

4. Click ‘Start Sync’.

This begins the synchronization process.

When finished, the message ‘Synchronized to Device’ is displayed in Windows Media

Player 10.

7 When you have finished copying files, close Windows Media Player 10 on the PC.

ENTER

8 device.

Close the import screen on this

• If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes after copying, the import screen is automatically closed.

Note

• When using the sync function of

Windows Media Player 10, music, artist and album folders are created as follows:

Root

Music Artist 1 Album 1 music1.mp3

music2.mp3

Album 2 music1.wma

110

'Start Sync'

For more information refer to the Help menu of Windows Media Player 10.

Progress Bar

Connect PC

Copying

001 Folders ( 000 error )

000003 Files ( 000 error )

Exit

• To cancel the synchronization process while it is underway, press ENTER on the remote control. The Connect PC screen is closed.

• If synchronization fails, make sure that the Pioneer. HDD/DVD-Recorder device is selected at the synchronization screen of Windows Media Player 10, and try again.

Artist 2 Album 1 music1.mp3

• Folders containing no files are not displayed in the Jukebox (such as the above ‘Artist1’ and ‘Artist2’ folders), but do count toward the maximum of 999 folders allowed in Jukebox.

• Up to 999 tracks can be included in one album. Note that when there are many tracks contained in one album, it may take time to display and transfer these tracks.

• Albums and tracks with no set name that are transferred from CD/DVD/USB are displayed as ‘UnknownAlbum’ and

‘UnknownFile’ in Windows Media Player

10.

• Album and track names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may display differently in Windows Media

Player 10 and the Jukebox.

• When albums are deleted in the

Jukebox, their file hierarchy as displayed in Windows Media Player may change.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 111 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Using the Jukebox

• File whose extensions are not supported by the Jukebox (i.e. files that are not

.mp3 or .wma) cannot be transferred.

• Files imported to this recorder via

Connect PC cannot be exported from this recorder.

• Note that no recording functions, including timer recordings, will be carried out when you are using the

Connect PC function.

Playing music from the

Jukebox

You can select albums or individual tracks from the Jukebox to play.

HOME MENU

Menu.

Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home

• If you want to start playback from a selected track in an album, or play a track that is set to Jump, press to enter the track list then select a track to play.

Track name

Jukebox

By number

All Genres

HDD

Remain

47.0 G

10Albums

Album1

Album2

Album3

Album4

Album5

Album6

9 Album7

10 Album8

Jupiter

MP3 8 MB

ALL

Mars

Venus

Mercury

Jupiter

Saturn

Uranus

Neptune

classical

Play

Erase

Edit

Play Mode

Genre Name

3-10

0.03.58

• Press SUBTITLE or change the page.

ANGLE to

Changing the album view

ENTER

•

Select a Jukebox option.

Listen to Music/Edit – Listen to CDs or

WMA/MP3 files that have been copied to the HDD.

• Listen to Music from USB device –

Listen to music from an external USB device.

ENTER

3 Select what you want to play.

The screen below shows albums stored on the HDD:

Album name

Jukebox

By number

All Genres

HDD

Remain

47.0 G

Album1

Album2

Album3

Album4

ALL

7 Album5

8 Album6

9 Album7

10 Album8

Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical

Total 12 70 MB

10Albums

Play

Erase

Edit

Play Mode

Genre Name

3-10

0.03.58

Info for selected album Playback status

• If you select a whole album to play, all tracks that are not set to Jump will play.

1 From the album list, display the view options menu panel.

ENTER

2 Select a view option.

Jukebox

Genre

All Genres

Cancel

HDD

3 Album1

4 Album2

By number

By album

5 Album3

6 Album4

7 Album5

8 Album6

9 Album7

10 Album8

Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical

Total 12 70 MB

ALL

10Albums

Play

Erase

Edit

Play Mode

Genre Name

3-10

0.03.58

• Sort order

By number – Albums are listed by the album number.

By favourite – Most often listened to music appears at the top of the list.

By album – Albums are listed alphabetically.

111

12 Jukebox.fm 112 ページ２００７年３月３０日　金曜日　午後５時３３分

Using the Jukebox

• Genre

Jukebox

3 Album1

By number

Genre

Best

Rock

All Genres

Jazz

Classical

HDD

4 Album2

5 Album3

Album4

Album5

Album6

Album7

10 Album8

Album1 The Planets/Mars-Venus-Mercury-Jup iter-Saturn-Uranus-Nep classical

Total 12 70 MB

Remain

47.0 G

ALL

10Albums

Play

Erase

Edit

Play Mode

Genre Name

3-10

0.03.58

All Genres – All albums are displayed.

Genre – Only albums in the selected genre are displayed.

Editing Jukebox albums

A number of commands are available for editing and changing the playback behavior of albums.

HOME MENU

Menu.

Select ‘Jukebox’ from the Home

ENTER

Select ‘Listen to Music/Edit’.

ENTER

Select what you want to edit.

ENTER

4 Select an edit function from the command menu panel.

• Erase – Erase the selected track (if all tracks in an album are selected, the whole album is erased).

• Edit > Album name – Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the album. See

Title Name on page 91 for how to enter names.

• Edit > Track name – Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the track. See Title

Name on page 91 for how to enter names.

• Edit > Set Genre – Set or change the genre for the album.

• Edit > Jump Set

– Set a track to jump so that it doesn’t play (choose this command again to cancel the Jump setting).

• Play Mode – Change the playback order for albums and tracks.

• Genre Name – Enter a name of up to 12 characters for a genre. See Title Name on page 91 for how to enter names.

112

Note

1 Tracks set to Jump will be skipped during consecutive track playback.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 113 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The PhotoViewer

Chapter 13

The PhotoViewer

From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on the HDD, recordable DVD or CD-R/-RW/-ROM, or on a

USB-equipped digital camera.

You can also import files and save them to the recorder’s

HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc.

Locating JPEG picture files

HOME MENU

Select ‘PhotoViewer’ from the

Home Menu.

ENTER

2 Select the location of the files you want to view or edit.

The first image from the selected folder is displayed as thumbnail at the bottom of the screen. From the Folder Information column, you can change thumbnails via the

buttons.

Currently selected folder in folder list

PhotoViewer HDD

Folder

Select Folder

001 Folder1

002 Folder2

003 Folder3

004 Folder4

005 Folder5

006 Folder6

007 Folder7

008 Folder8

HDD

Remain

100.0 G

002 Folder2

Files 999

1/3

FOLDER

Folder information

Pages in folder list View/Edit Photos on the HDD

View Photos on a CD/DVD

View Photos on a USB Device

Copy Files from a Digital Camera

4 Select the file you want to view, copy or edit.

Currently selected thumbnail

• View/Edit Photos on the HDD – View or edit photos already stored on the recorder’s HDD.

• View Photos on a CD/DVD – View photos on a Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM,

CD-R/-RW, or DVD-R/-RW.

• View Photos on a USB Device – View photos on a digital camera (or other USB device) connected to the USB port.

• Copy Files from a Digital Camera –

Copy all DCF files directly from a connected digital camera to a recordable DVD-R/-RW.

ENTER

3 Select the folder containing the files you want to view, copy or edit.

PhotoViewer HDD

Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB

File

12 Files

HDD

Remain

100.0 G

001 PIOR0000

002 PIOR0001

003 PIOR0002

004 PIOR0003

005 PIOR0004

006 PIOR0005

007 PIOR0006

008 PIOR0007

009 PIOR0008

010 PIOR0009

011 PIOR0010

012 PIOR0011

1/84

FILE

Pages in file list

• The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder to load the file.

• You can change folders via the

/ buttons.

Note

1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected

USB camera it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB device on page 115).

113

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 114 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The PhotoViewer

• If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that the disc and file formats are compatible with this recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created disc compatibility on page 11).

• The thumbnail of files that cannot be played is displayed as the logo.

Changing the display style of the PhotoViewer

You can choose to display photos by grouping them by folder, file, or number of thumbnails.

Playing a slideshow

ENTER

1 Select a folder from the folder list.

To start the slideshow from the first file in the folder, skip to step 3 after choosing the desired folder and pressing .

• Use

Select a thumbnail.

PREV and NEXT to display the previous/next page of thumbnails.

1 panel.

Display the View Options

The View Options panel

PhotoViewer HDD

Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB

Display Mode

Style

File

12 Files

HDD

Remain

100.0 G

001 PIOR0000

002 PIOR0001

003 PIOR0002

004 PIOR0003

005 PIOR0004

006 PIOR0005

007 PIOR0006

008 PIOR0007

009 PIOR0008

010 PIOR0009

011 PIOR0010

012 PIOR0011

1/84

FILE

ENTER

2 Choose ‘Display Mode’ or

‘Style’ then press ENTER to see the available view options.

• Display Mode – Choose between folder and file display modes.

• Style – Choose between displays of 1, 4 and 12 thumbnails.

ENTER

3 Choose a view option, then press ENTER.

The display mode will change to that which you have chosen.

ENTER

3 Select ‘Start Slideshow’ or

‘Start Audio Slideshow’ from the menu.

When you select ‘Start Audio Slideshow’, you are prompted to select the Genre of music you would like to hear, and when you press ENTER , music of that Genre stored on the Jukebox will be played during the slideshow.

For more information on adding music to the

HDD, see Using the Jukebox on page 108.

• You can also select a file or folder then press PLAY to start playing the slideshow.

• Use PREV/ NEXT to display the previous/next picture, or PAUSE to pause the slideshow.

• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and right.

• Large picture files may take a few seconds to display. This is normal.

STOP

4 Press to return to the thumbnail.

• You can also use the RETURN/EXIT button.

HOME MENU

Press to exit the PhotoViewer.

114

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 115 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The PhotoViewer

Zooming an image

During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move the area of the picture displayed.

Importing files to the HDD

You can import files and save them to the

HDD

from a CD, DVD or a connected USB camera. Once on the HDD you can edit and organize your pictures and print them out if you’ve connected a PictBridge-compatible printer.

1 ENTER Press during the slideshow to zoom the picture.

Repeated presses cycle between zoom off,

2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.

2 area.

Use to move the zoomed

ENTER

1 Select the location of folders/ files you want to import.

To import a whole folder, select the desired folder, press , and skip to step 3 below.

• To import multiple folders, use the Multi-

Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 116.

Rotating an image

You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow so you can always view pictures the right way up, whichever way they were taken.

ANGLE

• Press during the slideshow to rotate the displayed picture clockwise by

90º.

Press repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in increments of 90º.

2 press

....

Select a file to import, then

• To import multiple files, use the Multi-

Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 116.

3 menu.

ENTER

Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the

Reloading files from a disc or

USB device

If you have a disc with more than 1000 files and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the images using the reload function.

PhotoViewer CD/DVD

Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB

File

12 Files

HDD

Remain

100.0 G

001 PIOR0000

002 PIOR0001

003 PIOR0002

004 PIOR0003

005 PIOR0004

006 PIOR0005

007 PIOR0006

008 PIOR0007

009 PIOR0008

010 PIOR0009

011 PIOR0010

012 PIOR0011

Start Slideshow

Copy all to HDD

Copy to HDD

Detailed Information

Multi-Mode

FILE

1/84 1 Navigate to the last entry in the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).

2 ENTER Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 folders from the disc or connected USB device.

It will take a moment (at most a few minutes) to load in the images.

ENTER

Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and copy the folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to cancel.

• The files will be copied to the HDD with the same folder structure as the original.

Note

1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading.)

2 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW.

115

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 116 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The PhotoViewer

• Importing to the HDD will not work if there is insufficient space on the HDD, or if there are already the maximum number of files and/or folders on the

HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder).

Selecting multiple files or folders

The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple folders/files at once for importing or editing.

ENTER

1 Select the folder containing the files you want to import.

ENTER

4 Select files/folders from the list.

An orange check mark box ( ) is shown by the item you selected. A blue check mark box ( ) appears on the folder select screen when files from that folder are selected.

PhotoViewer HDD

Folder

Select Folder

001 Folder1

002 Folder2

003 Folder3

004 Folder4

005 Folder5

006 Folder6

007 Folder7

008 Folder8

HDD

Remain

100.0 G

Multi-Mode

002 Folder2

Files 999

1/3

FOLDER

2 Display the command menu.

5 Display the command menu.

3 menu.

ENTER

Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the

PhotoViewer HDD

Folder

Select Folder

001 Folder1

002 Folder2

003 Folder3

004 Folder4

005 Folder5

006 Folder6

007 Folder7

008 Folder8

HDD 002 Folder2

Files 999

Start Slideshow

Start Audio Slideshow

New Folder

Folder Options

Copy to DVD

Multi-Mode

FOLDER

1/3

ENTER

6 Select the command you want to apply to all the selected items.

Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW

Using this feature you can copy all the files

(including audio and movie files) stored on a connected USB camera to a recordable DVD disc.

A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible with JPEG file playback.

Once the files have been copied, the disc is automatically finalized.

116

Note

1 • There is a limit to the number of files/amount of data that you can copy at one time.

• Only DCF format files in DCIM folders can be copied to a recordable DVD-R/-RW.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 117 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The PhotoViewer

Important

• Use a blank DVD-R/-RW disc, or one that has already been initialized for Video mode recording but has nothing yet recorded on it. Discs that have already been recorded on (as well as CD-R/-RW discs) cannot be used.

• After backing up the pictures in your digital camera to DVD, we recommend verifying that they have been recorded properly before deleting anything from the camera.

1 Press HOME MENU and select

‘PhotoViewer’ to display the

PhotoViewer screen.

2 Load a blank (or unrecorded Video mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.

3 Select ‘Copy Files from a Digital

Camera’ from the menu.

View/Edit Photos on the HDD

View Photos on a CD/DVD

View Photos on a USB Device

Copy Files from a Digital Camera

4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel.

• Note that during copying, any timer programmes set to start will not begin, and no other operations are possible.

1 mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.

ENTER

2 Select ‘View/Edit Photos on the HDD’ from the menu.

ENTER

3 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to copy.

• Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it.

• To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-

Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 116.

• A maximum of 99 slideshow titles can be recorded.

• One slideshow title can contain up to 99 files. If there are more files than this in the slideshow, multiple slideshows are created on the disc.

• If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD the slideshow will become unplayable but the free space will not increase.

Load a blank (or unfinalized Video menu.

Important

ENTER

Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the

Copying selected files to a

DVD-R/-RW

This feature allows you just to copy some of the files stored on HDD to a DVD.

A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible with JPEG file playback. Note however that you may need to finalize the disc before it will play on another DVD player

(copying selected files doesn’t automatically finalize the disc).

ENTER

5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel.

• Folder names on the disc will be number PIONR . File names will be

PHOT number.

• Note that during copying, any timer programmes set to start will not begin, and no other operation is possible.

• While ‘Cancel’ is displayed, you can press ENTER to cancel.

117

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 118 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The PhotoViewer

118

Editing files on the HDD

There are a number of commands you can use to edit and organize your pictures stored on the HDD.

Creating a new folder

2 Display the command menu.

1 the menu.

From the folder list, display

ENTER

2 Select ‘New Folder’.

The folder appears at the bottom of the folder list with the name F_ number .

PhotoViewer HDD

Folder

Select Folder

001 Folder1

002 Folder2

003 Folder3

004 Folder4

005 Folder5

006 Folder6

007 Folder7

008 Folder8

HDD

Remain

100.0 G

002 Folder2

Files 999

Start Slideshow

Start Audio Slideshow

New Folder

Folder Options

Copy to DVD

Multi-Mode

FOLDER

1/3

• There can be up to 999 folders on the

HDD.

Erasing a file or folder

ENTER

Options’.

Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder

PhotoViewer HDD

Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB

File

12 Files

HDD

Remain

100.0 G

001 PIOR0000

002 PIOR0001

003 PIOR0002

004 PIOR0003

005 PIOR0004

006 PIOR0005

007 PIOR0006

008 PIOR0007

009 PIOR0008

010 PIOR0009

011 PIOR0010

012 PIOR0011

Start Slideshow

Start Audio Slideshow

File Options

Copy to DVD

Detailed Information

FILE

Multi-Mode

1/84

ENTER

Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’.

PhotoViewer HDD

Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB

File

12 Files

HDD

Remain

100.0 G

001 PIOR0000

002 PIOR0001

003 PIOR0002

004 PIOR0003

005 PIOR0004

006 PIOR0005

007 PIOR0006

008 PIOR0007

009 PIOR0008

010 PIOR0009

011 PIOR0010

012 PIOR0011

Copy

Start Audio Slideshow

File Options

Lock

Copy to DVD

Detailed Information

FILE

Multi-Mode

Cancel

1/84

1 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to erase.

• To erase multiple files or folders, use the

Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 116.

• Erasing a folder will erase all the files contained in it. Please be careful!

• You can’t erase files that have been locked.

• Folders containing locked files can’t be erased. Unlocked files in the folder, however, will be erased.

ENTER

5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel.

• You can also erase a file or folder by pressing CLEAR when the file or folder is highlighted. Press ENTER to confirm.

Copying files

1 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to copy.

• Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it.

• To copy multiple files or folders, use the

Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 116.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 119 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The PhotoViewer

2 Display the command menu.

ENTER

Options’.

Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder

ENTER

Contents’.

Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder

PhotoViewer HDD

Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB

File

12 Files

HDD

001 PIOR0000

002 PIOR0001

003 PIOR0002

004 PIOR0003

005 PIOR0004

006 PIOR0005

007 PIOR0006

008 PIOR0007

009 PIOR0008

010 PIOR0009

011 PIOR0010

012 PIOR0011

Erase

Start Slideshow

Start Audio Slideshow

Copy

File Options

Lock

Copy to DVD

Detailed Information

FILE

1/84

ENTER

5 Select a folder to copy the folder(s)/file(s) to.

3 Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename

Folder’.

PhotoViewer HDD

Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB

File

12 Files

HDD

Remain

100.0 G

001 PIOR0000

002 PIOR0001

003 PIOR0002

004 PIOR0003

005 PIOR0004

006 PIOR0005

007 PIOR0006

008 PIOR0007

009 PIOR0008

010 PIOR0009

011 PIOR0010

012 PIOR0011

Copy

Start Audio Slideshow

File Options

Lock

Copy to DVD

Detailed Information

FILE

Multi-Mode

Cancel

1/84

4 Enter a new name for the file/folder.

File names or Folder names can be up to 64 characters long.

See Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name and Using a USB keyboard to enter a name on page 92 for how to enter a name.

Locking/Unlocking files

Locking files will protect them from accidental erasure and prevent them from being renamed.

Use the same process to both lock and unlock files. Locked files are displayed in the

PhotoViewer with a padlock icon.

ENTER

6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel.

• Copying to the HDD will not work if there is insufficient space on the HDD; if there are already the maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD.

Naming files and folders

1 Select the file or folder you want to rename.

You can’t rename files that have been locked.

2 Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder

Options’.

1 Select the file(s) you want to lock (or unlock).

• To lock/unlock multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 116.

2 Display the command menu.

ENTER

Options’.

Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder

119

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 120 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The PhotoViewer

ENTER

Contents’.

Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder

PhotoViewer HDD

Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB

File

12 Files

HDD

001 PIOR0000

002 PIOR0001

003 PIOR0002

004 PIOR0003

005 PIOR0004

006 PIOR0005

007 PIOR0006

008 PIOR0007

009 PIOR0008

010 PIOR0009

011 PIOR0010

012 PIOR0011

Erase

Start Slideshow

Start Audio Slideshow

Copy

File Options

Lock

Copy to DVD

Detailed Information

FILE

1/84

Locked files are shown with a padlock icon next to them. To remove all locks within a given folder, choose ‘Folder Option’ >

‘Unlock Folder Contents’ .

To view detailed information

This feature allows you to check the settings of the camera from which you imported the photos.

1 Choose the file for which you would like to see detailed information.

2 Choose ‘Detailed Information’.

When no detailed information is available, nothing is displayed.

2 Display the command menu.

ENTER

Select ‘Print’ from the menu.

PhotoViewer HDD

Folder2 Folder Size 999 MB

File

12 Files

HDD

Remain

100.0 G

001 PIOR0000

002 PIOR0001

003 PIOR0002

004 PIOR0003

005 PIOR0004

006 PIOR0005

007 PIOR0006

008 PIOR0007

009 PIOR0008

010 PIOR0009

011 PIOR0010

012 PIOR0011

Start Slideshow

Start Audio Slideshow

File Options

Copy to DVD

Detailed Information

FILE

Multi-Mode

1/84

ENTER

4 Select ‘Start’ to confirm, or

‘Cancel’ to cancel.

• Once printing has started, you can cancel by pressing ENTER .

Tip

• Paper size and layout can be set; the options available depend on your printer

— check the printer manual for details.

• This recorder may not work correctly with all printers.

Printing files

Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB port will enable you to print out picture files

stored on the HDD, a CD/DVD, or directly from a digital camera.

Make sure that the printer (and your digital camera if you are using that as a source) is connected to the recorder before starting.

1 Select the file(s) you want to print.

• To print multiple files, use the Multi-

Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 116.

120

Note

1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 121 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Disc Setup menu

Chapter 14

The Disc Setup menu

From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure, initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is accessed from the Home menu.

Basic settings

Lock Disc

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM

• Default setting: Off

Locking the disc will prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc.

Input Disc Name

DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM

When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99 . You can use the Input Disc Name function to change the default disc name to something more descriptive. This name appears when you load the disc and when you display disc information on-screen.

HOME MENU

Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the

Home Menu.

Important

• A locked disc can still be initialized

(which will completely erase the disc).

HOME MENU

Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the

Home Menu.

ENTER

2 Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock Disc’ then ‘On’ or ‘Off’.

Disc Setup

Initialize

Finalize

Optimize HDD

Input Disc Name

DVD-RW Auto Init.

Off

ENTER

2 Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc

Name’ > ‘Next Screen’.

Disc Setup

Initialize

Finalize

Optimize HDD

Lock Disc

DVD-RW Auto Init.

Next Screen

ENTER

3 Input a name for the disc.

The disc name can be up to 64 characters long for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode discs and DVD+R/+RW.

• See Title Name on page 91 for more on navigating the input screen.

Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc to make edits, select

Off .

DVD-RW Auto Initialize

DVD-RW

• Default setting: VR Mode

Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired initialization mode before inserting a disc.

See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 73 for detailed instructions.

121

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 122 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Disc Setup menu

Initialize settings

DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM

You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW disc for either VR mode or Video mode recording.

The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto

Init. setting in the Disc Setup menu (see page 73).

New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize them for VR mode recording.

DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized as a way of erasing the entire disc.

When initializing a DVD-RAM disc, select VR mode.

See Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 72 for detailed instructions.

Undo Finalize

DVD-RW

You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you want to record more material or edit material already on the disc.

You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be recorded.

Undo the finalization.

is displayed, use this command to be able to record on the disc using this recorder.

HOME MENU

Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the

Home Menu.

ENTER

2 Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo

Finalize’ then ‘Start’.

Optimize HDD

Finalize settings

Finalize

DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW

Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable

DVD-ROM drive.

It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs.

This is only necessary if you want to a player to display a title menu for the disc.

See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on page 71 for detailed instructions.

HDD

As you record, erase and edit recordings, the

HDD file system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented files.

When the HDD needs optimizing the recorder will automatically display a message recommending optimization.

Important

• Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours. During optimization, playback and recording are not possible.

• Cancelling optimization mid-way does not undo the optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly optimized.

122

Note

1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also, once recorded in Video mode, the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 123 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Disc Setup menu

HOME MENU

Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the

Home Menu.

‘Start’.

ENTER

Disc Setup

Basic

Initialize

Finalize

Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then

Optimize HDD Start

A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go. If no actions are carried out for more than 20 minutes after the optimization process is completed, the unit turns itself off.

Initialize HDD

HDD

When your HDD/DVD recorder is working without a problem this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu. However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for some reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the problem. Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it.

HOME MENU

Select ‘Disc Setup’ from the

Home Menu.

‘Start’.

ENTER

Disc Setup

Basic

Initialize

Finalize

Select ‘Initialize HDD’ then

Initialize HDD Start

123

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 124 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Video Adjust menu

Chapter 15

The Video Adjust menu

Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc playback, and for recording.

Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs

Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality settings for the built-in TV tuner

and for each external input. There are several preset settings that suit various sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.

Choosing a preset

1 HOME MENU With the recorder stopped, press to display the Home Menu.

• Memory1 – user preset 1

• Memory2 – user preset 2

• Memory3 – user preset 3

You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( Tuner , VCR or DTV/LDP ).

Creating your own set

There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings.

1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1,

2 or 3).

ENTER

Select ‘Detailed Settings’.

Pr 1

Memory1

Detailed Settings

ENTER

Select ‘Video Adjust’.

ENTER

Select a preset.

Pr 1

3 adjust.

ENTER

Memory1

Select the setting you want to

Pr 1

Tuner

Detailed Settings

• Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the built-in TV tuner and the external inputs.

• Use the Smart Jog to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.

There are six presets available:

• Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts

• VCR – suitable for video cassettes

• DTV/LDP – suitable for digital broadcasts and Laserdiscs

Prog. Motion

PureCinma

3-D Y/C

YNR

CNR

Detail

White AGC

Motion

Off

Auto

Off

Still

Max

You can adjust the following settings:

• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive.

124

Note

1 When the Component Video Out (see page 131) is set to Interlace , the settings for the digital tuner cannot be changed.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 125 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Video Adjust menu

• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive. Usually set to Auto ; but try switching to Off if the picture appears unnatural.

• 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness/colour separation.

• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y

(brightness) component.

• CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour) component.

• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.

• White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level adjustment.

• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.

• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.

• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black level (525 Input Line

System only).

• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and green.

• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours appear.

ENTER

4 setting.

Adjust the currently selected

HOME MENU

Press to exit.

You can now use the preset for any other input or the built-in TV tuner.

Tip

• To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust.

Setting the picture quality for disc playback

This setting determines how the picture will look when playing discs.

Choosing a preset

HOME MENU

With a disc playing (or paused), press to display the Home Menu.

ENTER

Select ‘Video Adjust’.

ENTER

Select a setting.

Detailed Settings

There are six presets available:

• TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray tube TVs

• PDP – suitable for plasma display screens

• Professional – suitable for professional monitors

• Memory1 – user preset 1

• Memory2 – user preset 2

• Memory3 – user preset 3

You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset ( TV , PDP or

Professional ).

Creating your own set

There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.

1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1,

2 or 3).

125

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 126 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Video Adjust menu

2 Move the cursor down and select

‘Detailed Settings’.

Memory1

Detailed Settings

3 Select the picture quality setting you want to adjust.

Memory1

Prog. Motion

PureCinma

YNR

BNR

MNR

Sharpness

Detail

Motion

Off

Soft

Auto1

Still

Max

Fine

126

You can adjust the following settings:

• Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive. (Prog. Motion is ineffective when PureCinema is On.)

• PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive. Usually set to Auto 1 but try switching to Auto 2 ,

On or Off if the picture appears unnatural.

• YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y

(brightness) component.

• BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the block noise

(artefacts visible in areas of flat colour, caused by MPEG compression).

• MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the mosquito noise (artefacts visible around the edges of an image, caused by MPEG compression).

• Sharpness – Adjusts the sharpness of the high-frequency (detailed) elements in the picture. Sharpness is ineffective for HDMI output.

• Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.

• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white. White Level is ineffective for HDMI output.

• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black. Black Level is ineffective for HDMI output.

• Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black level. Black Setup is ineffective for HDMI output.

• Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of darker images. Gamma

Correction is ineffective for HDMI output.

• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and green. Hue is ineffective for

HDMI output.

• Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours appear. Chroma Level is ineffective for HDMI output.

4 Use the

buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting.

5 When you have all the settings as you want them, press HOME MENU to exit.

Tip

• To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 127 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Chapter 16

The Initial Setup menu

Using the Initial Setup menu

The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.

Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.

Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.

• Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’.

In the table below, the default option is marked with a •.

Setting

Basic

Clock Setting

Options Explanation

Auto

Manual •

Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set automatically.

If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you can set the time and date manually.

• If any digital TV channels are set then the clock will automatically be set.

• The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.

Input Line System 525 System Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external input.

625 System • Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.

• This setting is applicable only when recording from an external input.

• See also About the input line system on page 141 for more information on this setting.

Power Save Mode 1 Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed through to the antenna output when the recorder is in standby.

Mode 2 No input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder is in standby.

Off • When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving at the SCART and antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs.

HELP Setting On •

Off

Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays.

Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (Press HELP on the remote to manually display the Help screen.)

127

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 128 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Setting

EPG Type Select

Setup Navigator

Options

GUIDE Plus+

Digital EPG

Start

Explanation

Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG.

Use the EPG based on information provided by D.TV broadcasts.

Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also

Switching on and setting up on page 30 .

Digital Tuner

Replace Channels Next Screen Scans for digital channels and replaces all the channel presets with the results. Before the scan starts you will need to select your country.

After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels were found, and if so, how many.

(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or RETURN/EXIT . In this case, no channels are set.)

If you execute a Replace Channels command, any timer recordings set for D.TV channels will be erased.

Add New Channels Next Screen Automatically scans for new digital channels.

After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels were found, and if so, how many.

(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or RETURN/EXIT . In this case, no new channels are set.)

Channel Sort Next Screen Use this screen to sort channel presets into your prefered order. Use the

///

buttons to highlight the channel you want to move, press

ENTER . Use the cursor buttons again to highlight the position you want to move the channel preset to, then press ENTER again.

(If there are more channel presets than will fit on one screen, you can select the next/previous page by highlighting the small triangular marks and pressing

ENTER .)

128

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 129 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Setting

Channel Options

Options

Next Screen

Explanation

From this screen you can skip or lock channels.

Locked channels will require the correct password to be entered before the channel can be watched. Use the

///

buttons to highlight a preference box and press ENTER to toggle the preference.

To enter this screen, input the parental lock password when prompted (if one has not yet been set then the password you enter becomes the parental lock password).

Auto Skip Off •

Radio

No channels are automatically skipped.

Radio channels are skipped when selecting channels.

Data channels are skipped when selecting channels.

Signal Check

Aerial Power

Data

Radio & Data

Next Screen

Radio and data channels are skipped when selecting channels.

Use this screen to check the signal level and quality of digital channels. Use the / buttons to change the RF channel; select Add New Channels then press ENTER to scan for new channels; press HOME

MENU to exit.

Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) when this recorder is on or in standby.

Auto Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) only when this recorder is on.

Off • This recorder does not supply power to the connected aerial (antenna).

• If the setting keeps reverting to Off when you try to set to On or Auto , the aerial may not be connected properly, or it may be shorted. In either case, check the connection and try making the setting again.

D.TV Language Next Screen From this screen you can set your Primary and

Secondary Audio preference for multilingual digital broadcasts, your Primary and Secondary Subtitle preference for programmes that are broadcast with subtitles, and your Teletext language preference. Use the / buttons to highlight a field then use the /

buttons to change it.

129

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 130 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Setting

Analog Tuner

Auto Channel

Setting

Options

Auto Scan

Download from

Manual CH Setting Next Screen

Channel Swapping Next Screen

Explanation

Select your country and then wait for the recorder to auto tune into channels in your area. After auto scan has finished, the channel mapping screen appears showing which channels have been assigned to which programme numbers. You can skip unwanted channels using the Manual CH Setting option below.

Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping screen.

If your TV supports this feature you can download all the channels that your TV is tuned to via the SCART input. Select your country and then wait for the download to complete. After the download is complete, the channel mapping screen appears, as above.

See also the operating instructions that came with your TV for more information.

Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings made by auto tuning. Select your country, then proceed to the manual channel setting screen:

• Change channel presets using the Smart Jog .

• To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that channel), change the Skip setting to On .

• Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel system of your country or region.

• Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want to assign to the current channel preset.

• To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off then adjust the Level setting.

• Set the Sound System setting to match the sound system of your region.

• The Name field allows you to input a name of up to five characters for the current channel preset.

• If the currently selected channel is scrambled requiring a decoder connected to the AV2 (INPUT 1/

DECODER) , set the Decoder setting to On .

Proceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different presets so that you can group together presets that naturally go together.

Select two presets to swap then press ENTER .

130

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 131 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Setting

Video In/Out

Input Colour

System

Options

Next Screen

Explanation

Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for the external input and the built-in TV tuner. Use the Smart Jog or INPUT SELECT buttons to change the preset or external input. On the default

Auto setting the recorder can generally correctly detect whether the input signal is PAL, SECAM, 3.58

NTSC or PAL-60, but in some cases you may have to set it manually if the picture is displayed incorrectly.

• Input Colour System cannot be set when the recorder is in D.TV mode.

• See also About the input colour system on page 141 for more information on this setting.

Component Video

Out

Interlace • Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video.

Progressive Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the operating instructions that came with your monitor/TV if you’re not sure.

• For Component Video Out to be effective, the AV1 Out setting (see below) must be set to something other than

RGB .

• If your TV is incompatible with progressive scan video and you select Progressive , you will not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to switch to Interlace (this also switches Screen Resolution on page 138 to the default setting).

• When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT .

AV1 Out Video • Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to standard composite video (compatible with all TVs).

S-Video

RGB

Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to S-video.

Recommended if you are using a long SCART cable.

Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to RGB. Good quality but check your TV for compatibility. Note that on this setting signals from the built-in tuner and from external inputs is not output when the recorder is in TV mode.

• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case either switch off and reconnect using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 157).

• The Component Video Out setting (see above) has no effect when AV1 Out is set to RGB .

• When the HDMI signal is output, the AV1 Out outputs the composite video signal even when it is set to RGB .

131

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 132 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Setting

AV2/L1 In

Options

Video •

Explanation

Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to standard composite video.

S-Video

RGB

Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to

S-video.

Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to

RGB.

Decoder Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the

AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector. For scrambled channels, make sure that the channel

Decoder setting is set to On . (See Manual CH Setting on page 130.)

NTSC on PAL TV On •

Off

NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.

Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.

Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 141 for related information.

Audio In

NICAM Select NICAM •

Regular Audio

Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.

Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.

(You can still switch the audio to record using the

AUDIO button before recording.)

Analog Tuner Level Normal •

Compression

Standard setting.

Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing distortion.

External Audio Stereo • Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is standard stereo.

Bilingual Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.

When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.

Bilingual Recording A/L • Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or

DVD+R/+RW or in LPCM mode, from an external source.

B/R As above, but for right (B) channel recording.

When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback.

132

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 133 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Setting

DV Input

Options

Stereo 1 •

Stereo 2

Explanation

Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video shoot) from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.

Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.

Mix Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio tracks.

Audio Out

Dolby Digital Out

DTS Out

96 kHz PCM Out

Dolby Digital • Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being played.

Dolby Digital

PCM

Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output.

Use if your connected equipment doesn’t have a

Dolby Digital decoder.

On • Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played.

Off Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use when your connected equipment doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this case, use the analog audio outputs.

96 kHz 48 kHz • Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling rate.

96 kHz Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played.

MPEG Out MPEG Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using

MPEG audio is being played.

MPEG PCM • Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio decoder.

Audio DRC On Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control).

Use when listening to Dolby Digital material at low volume.

Off • Switches off Audio DRC.

Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby

Digital .

133

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 134 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Setting

Language

OSD Language

Options Explanation

English • Sets the language of the on-screen displays to

English.

available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the onscreen displays.

On Screen Display and D.TV Language will both reflect this setting.

Audio Language English • Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to English.

available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio language for DVD-Video playback.

Other Select to set the default audio language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 142.

Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference.

Subtitle Language English • Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to English.

available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback.

Other Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 142.

Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle

Language preference.

Auto Language On • On this setting:

• DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language will play using that language, without subtitles.

• Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but that have a subtitle track in your default language will play the original audio track with subtitles.

Off Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and subtitle language preferences.

For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language.

134

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 135 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Setting

DVD Menu

Language

Options w/Subtitle

Language •

Explanation

Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the subtitle language.

English Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.

available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for DVD-Video menus.

Other Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 142.

Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.

Subtitle Display On • Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Language and Auto Language preferences.

Off

Assist Subtitle

Select to switch off subtitle display.

Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available.

Some discs may override these settings.

Recording

Manual Recording On (go to setup)

Off •

All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to

MN32 , LPCM and XP+ modes can be set.

Just the standard recording modes ( XP , SP , LP , EP , SLP and SEP ) can be set.

See also Manual recording modes on page 145 for detailed information on manual recording levels.

Optimized Rec On The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to fit on to the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality setting. If the recording will not fit even at MN1 ( MN4 for DVD+R/

+RW), then the recording will be made to the HDD in the original quality selected.

Off • When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the selected media, the recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible.

Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be used together with VPS/PDC.

Subtitle Recording On The selected subtitle language is recorded with the

D.TV timer recording.

Off • No subtitles are recorded with D.TV timer recordings.

135

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 136 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Setting

Set Thumbnail

Options

0 seconds •

30 seconds

Explanation

Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc

Navigator to the first frame of the title.

Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title.

3 minutes Sets the default thumbnail picture to three minutes into the title.

Auto Chapter

(HDD/VR)

On • When recording to the HDD or in VR mode to a DVD, chapter marks are added at the black screen between commercials and main programming.

When recording in DV, chapter marks can be changed by date/time.

Auto Chapter

(Video)

Off

No Separation

10 minutes •

Automatic chapter marking is switched off.

When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes.

15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.

This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs.

Auto Chapter

(DVD+R/+RW)

No Separation

10 minutes •

Automatic chapter marking is switched off.

When recording in DVD+R/+RW or in real-time copying, chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes.

HDD Recording

Format

15 minutes

Video Mode Off

Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.

Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode.

Use this setting if you don’t need to transfer the recording later to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or

DVD+R/+RW.

Video Mode On • Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with

Video mode recordings. This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to a DVD-R/-RW

(Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW as high-speed copy can be used.

• When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 132.

• When the recording mode is set to XP+ , you cannot change HDD Recording Format.

136

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 137 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Setting

Playback

TV Screen Size

Options Explanation

4:3 (Letter Box)

4:3 (Pan & Scan) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan presentation for widescreen material.

16:9 •

Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override this setting.

Still Picture Field

Frame

Produces a stable, generally shake-free image.

Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake.

Auto •

Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings determine how 4:3 material will look.

Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image.

Seamless Playback On

Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format presentation for widescreen material.

Off •

Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the edit points.

You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during playback of a VR mode Play List.

This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback.

Angle Indicator On • A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD-Video disc.

Off Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing.

Parental Lock

Set Password /

Change Password

Next Screen If no password has yet been set, enter a four digit number to become your password. If you want to change the password, first enter your old password, then enter a new one.

DVD Playback

D.TV Age Limit

Next Screen

From this screen, first enter your password and then set a parental lock level for playback of DVDs with parental level coding.

Use this screen to enter an age limit for D.TV programmes. Programmes that are broadcast with age suitability guidelines that fall above the age set here will require the correct password to be entered before the channel can be viewed.

You must also enter your password in order to change the age limit setting.

This setting is only applicable when the country is set to France, Denmark, Finland or Sweden.

137

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 138 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

138

Setting Options Explanation

HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected)

Screen Resolution 1920 x 1080p

1920 x 1080i

Constant 1920 x 1080p output.

Constant 1920 x 1080i output.

1280 x 720p

720 x 576p

(720 x 480p)

Constant 1280 x 720p output.

720 x 576i

(720 x 480i)

Constant 720 x 576p output (when setting the Input

Line System to 525 System , video is output in 720 x

480p).

Constant 720 x 576i output (when setting the Input

Line System to 525 System , video is output in 720 x

480i).

• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 131 to the default setting).

• If you have the Colour set to YCbCr 4:2:2 , you cannot select 720 x 576i (720 x 480i) .

4:3 Video Output Full Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the aspect ratio.

Normal Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change the aspect ratio. 4:3 video will be shown with bars on each side.

Colour RGB (0–255)

RGB (16–235)

YCbCr 4:2:2

Use if colours are weak and black appears to ‘float’ on the RGB (16–235) setting.

Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the black too deep on the RGB (0–255) setting.

The video signal is output as a 10-bit YCbCr 4:2:2 component signal. This is the standard setting for

HDMI-compatible devices.

YCbCr 4:4:4 The video signal is output as a 8-bit YCbCr 4:4:4 component signal.

• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available.

• When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available.

• You cannot choose YCbCr 4:2:2 when the Screen Resolution is set to 720 x 576i (720 x 480i) .

Audio Output Auto • Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as a bitstream signal. However, depending on the

Audio Out setting, number of audio channels, and the HDMI-connected device, Linear PCM audio may be output.

PCM All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM

(except DTS).

Bitstream Priority Select if the connected device is compatible with bitstream audio.

This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected .

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 139 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Setting

Options

On Screen Display On •

Explanation

Remote Control

Mode

AV. Link

Off

Front Panel Display On •

Switches off the on-screen operation displays.

The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby.

Off

This Recorder

Only •

The front panel display is switched off in standby.

Recorder 1–3

(default: Recorder 1)

If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, set them to different IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to change the remote controller ID, press and hold RETURN/EXIT then press 1 , 2 or 3 to set. The remote will only control a recorder with the same ID.

Signals received through the AV input when the recorder is in standby are not passed through to the

AV output.

Pass Through

The recorder displays operation displays ( Stop , Play , etc.) on-screen.

Signals received when in standby are passed though to the output for connected devices. (Note that during EPG data download, the EPG data is not passed through.)

When set to Pass Through , make sure to set Power Save (page 127) to Off .

DivX VOD Registration Code Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code.

See DivX video compatibility on page 10 and DivX®

VOD content on page 11.

Set Preview

(HDD only)

Quick Preview • When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video plays short excerpts from throughout the selected title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally from the beginning.)

Normal The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the title.

CI Information Next Screen This option displays a menu of CI card functions.

Consult your service provider for more information on the functions available.

Software Update Next Screen The Software Update function can check for and download updated system software for the digital tuner. See Using Software Update (Digital tuner) on page 142.

139

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 140 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Setting

Options 2

USB

Options Explanation

Pause Live TV

Restart USB

Device

Confirm Printer

TV’s Tuner

Recorder’s

Tuner •

If the connected USB device does not respond to the recorder, try using this option to restart it. If the device still does not work properly try switching it off then back on, and/or disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable.

Use this option to confirm the make and model of the printer connected to the recorder (does not work with all printers).

Allows you to use the Pause Live TV feature with an

AV Link-compatible TV connected by SCART cable.

Allows you to use Pause Live TV with this recorder’s internal TV tuner.

See also Pause Live TV on page 66 for more information on this setting.

HDD Sleep Mode Proceed Puts the HDD to sleep. Using this feature when playing DVDs or CDs allows you to reduce noise produced by the unit, resulting in improved sound quality. When you wake the HDD back up it will take a few seconds to load.

The HDD can be taken out of Sleep Mode by any number of actions, including:

• Turning the power off and on again.

• Pressing the HDD/DVD button and choosing the

HDD.

• When a timer recording begins.

• When you try and make any changes to system settings.

140

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 141 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Additional information about the

TV system settings

About the input line system

This recorder is compatible with PAL,

SECAM, 3.58 NTSC and PAL-60 TV systems.

The Input Line System and Input Colour

System settings determine how the recorder treats incoming video signals from an external input.

Please note the following points when changing the input line system:

• When the current input is a built-in tuner channel preset, changing the input line system will usually also affect the input line system of the AV2 (INPUT 1/

DECODER) input. However if the AV2/L1

In setting is set to Decoder , then the L2 input is affected instead.

• If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the front panel (Stop) button then pressing INPUT SELECT (also front panel) while the recorder is stopped.

• When you switch the Input Line System setting the Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the (Stop) button and INPUT SELECT buttons as described above, there is no confirmation, so please use with care.

• You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems on the same disc.

• When you change this setting, the Input

Colour System setting also changes

(see below).

About NTSC on PAL TV

Depending on the Input Line System setting and the NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table below.

Input Line

System

NTSC on PAL

Output when stopped

625 System Off PAL

525 System

Off

PAL

NTSC

PAL–60

About the input colour system

The available options of the Input Colour

System setting depend on the Input Line

System setting. The table below shows the different options available.

Input Line

System

Built-in analog tuner

External input

625 System Auto Auto

525 System

PAL

SECAM n/a

PAL

SECAM

Auto

3.58 NTSC

PAL–60

Additional information about component video output

If you switch the Component Video Out setting to Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible with progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and hold the (Stop) button on the front panel, then press OPEN/CLOSE . This will set the recorder’s video output back to

Interlace.

141

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 142 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

The Initial Setup menu

Selecting other languages for language options

ENTER

1 Select ‘Other’ from the language list.

This option appears in the settings for DVD

Menu Language, Audio Language, and

Subtitle Language.

2 want.

ENTER

Select the language you

Initial Setup

Basic

Digital Tuner

Analogue Tuner

Video In/Out

Audio In

Language

Recording

OSD DVD Menu Language

Audio Language

Subtitle Language

Number

Subtitle Display

English

0 5 1 4

• Select by language name: Use the

/ buttons to change the language.

• Select by code number: Press then use the number buttons to enter the four-digit language code.

See Language code list on page 154 for a list of available languages and corresponding codes.

Using Software Update

(Digital tuner)

The Software Update function can keep the built-in digital tuner up to date with the latest system software. You can either check for updates manually, or have the recorder do it automatically at regular intervals.

Access the Software Update screen from the

Options menu.

There are three options available: Manual

Update, Auto Update and Technical

Information.

Manual Update

Select Manual Update to check for updated software immediately. If new software is found then it is automatically downloaded and installed. The new software will take effect the next time the recorder is powered on.

If for some reason the new software could not be downloaded successfully, a dialog box informs you of the error. Press HOME

MENU to exit or RETURN/EXIT to return to the previous screen.

Note that channel information may be erased when software update is used, and that timer recording will not work during the update.

To cancel manual update before it has completed, press HOME MENU .

Auto Update

By default, the Auto Update option is On , which means that periodically the recorder will check for and update the digital tuner software if it’s available. We recommend that you leave this option On .

If new software is found and successfully downloaded, the recorder automatically scans for new digital channels, informing you if any are found (this is the equivalent of using the Add New Channel option, found in the Digital Tuner section of the Initial Setup menu).

Technical Information

This displays the current hardware and software version numbers of the digital tuner.

142

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 143 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

Chapter 17

Additional information

Setting up the remote to control your TV

You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table below.

1 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the maker code for your TV.

See the table on the following page for the list of maker codes. If there is more than one code given for your make, input the first one in the list.

• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the table below, you will not be able to use this remote to control your

TV.

2 Press to check that the remote works with your TV.

If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/off. If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 1 with a new code.

RCA

Salora

Samsung

Sanyo

Sei

Sharp

Sony

Tandy

Telefunken

Thomson

Toshiba

JVC

Maker

Alba

Bush

Fisher

Fujitsu

Funai

Goldstar

Grandiente

Grundig

Hitachi

ITT

Mitsubishi

Nokia

Panasonic

Philips

Pioneer

73, 75

62, 89

Code

61, 65

51, 82

56, 60, 83, 86

53, 81

58, 72

57, 85, 89

50, 80

Using the TV remote control buttons

The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV.

Button What it does

Press to switch the TV on/off

(standby)

INPUT SELECT Press to change the TV’s video input

VOLUME +/– Use to adjust the TV volume

CHANNEL +/– Use to change TV channels

143

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 144 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

Minimum copying times

The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.

Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying.

Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility.

SEP

DVD disc type 10 h

DVD-R / 1x

DVD-RW / 1x

DVD-RW / 2x

DVD-R DL

DVD-RAM / 2x

DVD+R / 2.4x

DVD+RW / 2.4x

DVD+R DL

DVD-RAM / 3x

DVD-RAM / 5x

DVD-R / 4x

DVD-RW / 4x

DVD+R / 4x

DVD+RW / 4x

DVD-R / 8x / 16x

DVD+R / 8x / 16x

DVD-RW / 6x

DVD+RW / 8x

2.4x

6 mins.

3 mins.

2 mins.

1.5 mins.

1.25 mins.

SLP

8 h

7.5 mins.

4 mins.

2.5 mins.

2 mins.

1.6 mins.

Rec mode

6 h

10 mins.

5 mins.

3.5 mins.

2.5 mins.

2.2 mins.

4 h

15 mins.

7.5 mins.

6.3 mins.

5 mins.

4 mins.

3 mins.

2 h

30 mins.

15 mins.

12.5 mins.

10 mins.

7.5 mins.

5.5 mins.

1 h

60 mins.

30 mins.

25 mins.

20 mins.

15 mins.

11 mins.

Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded.

*1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP , SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied.

144

Note

1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may be made at 2x speed).

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 145 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

Manual recording modes

The table below shows the approximate recording times for different DVD types in each manual recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. For recording time on the HDD, see Specifications on page 158.

Level

MN 21

MN 22

MN 23

MN 24

MN 25

MN 26

MN 27

MN 28

MN 13

MN 14

MN 15

MN 16

MN 17

MN 18

MN 19

MN 20

MN 1

*3,4

MN 2

*3,4

MN 3

*3,4

MN 4

MN 5

MN 6

MN 7

MN 8

MN 9

MN 10

MN 11

MN 12

MN 29

MN 30

MN 31

MN 32

LPCM

XP+

Rec. time

Resolution

SEP

SLP

Single-Layer

DVD:

DVD-R/-RW

DVD+R/+RW

DVD-RAM

Dual-Layer

DVD:

DVD-R DL

DVD+R DL

802 mins.

1440 mins.

720 mins.

1292 mins.

600 mins.

1077 mins.

480 mins.

861 mins.

420 mins.

754 mins.

360 mins.

646 mins.

300 mins.

538 mins.

270 mins.

484 mins.

240 mins.

431 mins.

230 mins.

413 mins.

220 mins.

395 mins.

210 mins.

377 mins.

200 mins.

359 mins.

190 mins.

341 mins.

180 mins.

323 mins.

170 mins.

305 mins.

160 mins.

287 mins.

150 mins.

269 mins.

140 mins.

251 mins.

130 mins.

233 mins.

120 mins.

215 mins.

110 mins.

197 mins.

105 mins.

188 mins.

100 mins.

179 mins.

95 mins.

170 mins.

90 mins.

161 mins.

85 mins.

153 mins.

80 mins.

144 mins.

75 mins.

135 mins.

70 mins.

126 mins.

65 mins.

117 mins.

61 mins.

111 mins.

61 mins.

111 mins.

--- mins.

Video mode Off (HDD)

VR mode (DVD-R/-RW)

DVD-RAM

VR mode (DVD-R DL)

352 x 240 /

352 x 288

352 x 480 /

352 x 576

480 x 480 /

480 x 576

544 x 480 /

544 x 576

720 x 480 /

720 x 576

Video mode On (HDD)

Video mode (DVD-R/-RW)

DVD+R/+RW

Video mode (DVD-R DL)

DVD+R DL

352 x 240 /

352 x 288

352 x 480 /

352 x 576

720 x 480 /

720 x 576

Recording time may be slightly shorter for certain disc types or recording modes.

The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.

Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW.

Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW.

XP+ mode is available for HDD recordings only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be automatically recorded in MN32 mode.

145

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 146 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

• Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality.

• Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in Linear PCM format.

• See also Recording on page 59.

Troubleshooting

146

Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.

General

Problem

The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray

Remedy

• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7).

• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and labelside up).

• Take out the disc and clean it (page 156).

• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder.

Can’t eject a disc

Can’t play a disc

Can’t record a disc

Remote control does not work

All settings are reset

• Turn off the power to this device and press and hold on the front of the unit for more than three seconds.

OPEN/CLOSE

• Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 7).

• Take out the disc and clean it (page 156).

• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and labelside up).

• Press HDD/DVD to select the DVD.

• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate.

• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a

Line System different to the current recorder setting.

• DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copyonce protected recordings will not play in this recorder.

• Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7).

• Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been initialized (page 72). This can take up to an hour.

• If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the

CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 14).

• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder

(page 139). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1 .)

• Use the remote within its operating range (page 6).

• Replace the batteries (page 6).

• If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the settings will be lost.

• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 147 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

Problem

No picture

No sound or sound is distorted

Remedy

• Check that everything is connected properly (page 14).

• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct input.

• The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible

TV. Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel (Stop) button then pressing OPEN/CLOSE .

• If you are using an indoor antenna that requires power, make sure that

Aerial Power in the Initial Setup menu is set to On or Auto (page 129).

• If the aerial/antenna is not connected properly, or if it is shorted, the

Aerial Power setting will revert to Off automatically. Check the aerial connection and try making the setting again.

• When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT .

• Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up.

• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play. Press PLAY to resume regular playback.

• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or DTS compatible amp/receiver. If you have connected a suitable decoder, also make sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out >

DTS Out setting is On .

• Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case, switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog.

• Check the audio cable connections (page 14).

• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.

• During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels.

The main and sub channels are both output.

Cannot switch a bilingual programme

The picture from the external input is distorted

The picture is distorted • Change the Input Line System setting (page 141). (You can also change it by pressing the (Stop) button and INPUT SELECT on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.)

Screen is stretched vertically or horizontally

• If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.

• Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 137) is correct for the kind of TV you have (see also page 155).

• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.

• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video.

Audio/subtitle language cannot be changed

• Note that audio and subtitle languages cannot be changed during the recording of a digital broadcast.

• You can only use the audio track and subtitles for the language that were selected at the time of recording a digital broadcast. The audio track and subtitles cannot be changed to other languages.

147

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 148 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

Problem

Can’t play a disc recorded using this recorder on another player

Remedy

• If the disc was recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, make sure that it’s finalized (page 71).

• Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R and finalized.

• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW compatible in order to play it (page 7).

• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-

CPRM compatible players (page 61).

• DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded material may not play on other players. Finalize the disc and try again.

During playback the picture is dark or distorted

• When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.

Recorded contents are not clear or artefacts appear in areas of flat colour (due to MPEG compression; also known as block noise )

• Change the recording mode to XP / SP .

Can’t record or does not record successfully

• Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.

• For a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t already finalized.

• Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc:

– HDD: 999 titles

– VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc

– Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title

– DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254 chapters per disc)

• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.

• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 121).

• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match what you want to record (page 141).

• The power may have failed during recording.

Timer programme doesn’t record successfully

• When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.

• When recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, programmes that are copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a

VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 61).

• Two timer programmes may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record completely.

• The power may have failed during recording.

148

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 149 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

Problem Remedy

After briefly unplugging or after a power failure the front panel display shows

‘--:--’

• A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder. After unplugging or a power failure, the battery keeps all settings for a period of several minutes. Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again.

Front panel display shows ‘LOCKED’ when a button is pressed

• The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 69).

Can’t use One Touch

Copy (HDD to DVD)

• Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc.

Also make sure that for a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or a DVD+R, the disc isn’t finalized.

• Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc.

• If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of remaining recordable titles may not decrease.

• Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that there isn’t a disc menu on the disc you’re trying to use.

• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One Touch Copy will not work.

• If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP+ mode, the

One Touch Copy feature can’t be used.

• One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over eight hours long when copying to DVD+R/+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL).

• One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6 , SEP , SLP or EP titles when copying to DVD+R/+RW.

• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to

DVD.

Can’t use One Touch

Copy (DVD to HDD)

• Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than 999 titles on the HDD.

• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.

The device connected to the USB port is not recognized

• Check that the device is compatible with this recorder (page 22).

• Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length.

• Check that the USB cable is inserted fully.

• Check that the USB device is powered on.

• Try switching this recorder into standby mode and then back on.

• Try using the Restart USB Device option from the Initial Setup menu (page 140).

• If several USB devices (camera, USB memory, card reader, etc.) are connected at the same time, it’s possible that only the first device connected to this recorder will be recognized.

File names are not displayed properly.

• Files names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may not display correctly on this unit.

149

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 150 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

HDMI

Problem Remedy

The connected HDMI or

DVI device does not display any picture

(and the front panel

HDMI indicator does not light)

• Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the power of both components is on).

• Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on.

• Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next, switch on the HDMI/DVI device and leave it for around 30 seconds, then switch on this recorder.

• When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the following:

– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.

– The cable you’re using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a nonstandard cable may result in no picture being output.

– Don’t use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single cable to connect devices together.

• When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the following:

– The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit.

– The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible.

– The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p,

1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x

1080i/p) video input.

• If the recorder’s internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no

HDMI output.

• Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder.

No video from the

HDMI output

• If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press while holding down the

OPEN/CLOSE

(Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 131 to the default setting).

There’s no sound from the connected HDMI or

DVI device

• There is no sound when using a DVI terminal.

• Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with the manual that came with the connected device).

If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.

150

If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working

• Press (Stop) then try restarting playback.

• Press the front panel STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold STANDBY/ON for five seconds until the power switches off.

STANDBY/ON

HDD/DVD

STANDBY/ON

A.TV

D.TV

PLTV DivX COPY

DV IN USB

COMMON INTERFACE

OPEN/CLOSE

STOP REC

INPUT

SELECT

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 151 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

On-screen displays

The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning.

Message

• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment.

• Incompatible region number.

• Cannot record any more titles.

• No more space for file management data.

• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization.

• Cannot play this disc.

• This disc cannot be recorded.

• Cannot read the CPRM information.

• Could not record the information to the disc.

• Cannot edit.

• Could not initialize disc.

• Could not complete finalization successfully.

• Could not undo finalization successfully.

• Could not successfully unlock the disc.

• Incompatible or unreadable disc.

Explanation/Action

When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder automatically initializes it.

The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder and so will not play.

The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/chapters or combine chapters.

The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the finalization in order to recording/editing.

The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc, please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.

The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is dirty or damaged.

The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc with CPRM for recording.

• Cannot record to a disc that is not

CPRM compatible.

• Cannot record this content using

Video mode recording.

• This video cannot be recorded to

DVD+R/+RW.

• This content is copy protected.

• Incorrect CPRM information.

The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.

The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder may be damaged — please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.

151

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 152 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

Message

• Repairing disc.

• Repairing the HDD.

• Could not repair the disc.

Explanation/Action

During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when the power is restored.

• Overheating has stopped operation.

Press DISPLAY to clear message.

The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The contents of the recording will be lost.

The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating limit. If this message reappears, please ask your nearest Pioneerauthorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.

• HDD optimization is recommended.

This can be done using Disc Setup.

• Please perform HDD optimization.

This can be done using Disc Setup.

• The HDD has not been sufficiently optimized. Please optimize again.

The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping) to maintain playback and recording performance.

The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to maintain performance.

If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for optimization to complete properly. Please erase some titles from the HDD and optimize again.

• An error occurred. Please consult the service center. Note that contents on the HDD may be erased when servicing this unit

....

This message is displayed when information from the HDD cannot be read. The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest

Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.

• The Hard Disk Drive info is incorrect.

Use the Disc Setup menu to reinitialize.

As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be made. Reinitializing the HDD

(page 123) may result in your being able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will erase all recorded contents, including protected files.

• This signal’s TV system is different from the recorder’s setting.

• Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. Press DISPLAY to clear message.

The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different from the TV system settings of this recorder.

The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder.

• Playback has stopped because the TV system is different than the recording.

During recording or timer recording standby, the

TV System (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to stop automatically.

152

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 153 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

Message

• You are not allowed to watch this

Conditional Access Programme.

• There is no DV input or the input signal is unrecordable.

• No DV camcorder connected.

• You cannot connect more than one

DV camcorder at a time.

• Cannot operate the DV camcorder.

• Could not operate the DV camcorder.

Explanation/Action

A CA module or smart card (obtained from your service provider) is required to watch the selected programme. Insert the supplied module or card into the Common Interface card slot on the front panel of the recorder (page 25).

No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder.

The camcorder is not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched off.

This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to just one camcorder.

This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder.

Try switching off the camcorder then turn it back on again.

This recorder was not able to operate the DV camcorder.

The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to playback mode.

• The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please select playback mode on the DV camcorder.

• The printer is not ready or is not connected. Please check the printer.

• Printing has been cancelled because ...

This message is displayed when communication could not be established with the printer. See the

Troubleshooting section if you do not know the cause.

This message is displayed when there is a printer error during printing. After checking the printer for the cause of the error, either reconnect the printer and start the printing job again, or select “Yes” to resume printing (select “No” to cancel the print job). See also the operating instructions that came with your printer for possible causes of print errors.

153

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 154 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

Front-panel displays

The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning.

Message

• E01

• E02

Explanation/Action

The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs.

As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be made. Reinitializing the HDD

(page 123) may result in your being able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will erase all recorded contents, including protected files.

154

Language code list

Language (Language code letter), Language code

Japanese (ja), 1001

English (en), 0514

French (fr), 0618

German (de), 0405

Italian (it), 0920

Spanish (es), 0519

Chinese (zh), 2608

Dutch (nl), 1412

Portuguese (pt), 1620

Swedish (sv), 1922

Russian (ru), 1821

Greek (el), 0512

Polish (pl), 1612

Czech (cs), 0319

Norwegian (no), 1415

Afar (aa), 0101

Abkhazian (ab), 0102

Afrikaans (af), 0106

Amharic (am), 0113

Arabic (ar), 0118

Assamese (as), 0119

Aymara (ay), 0125

Azerbaijani (az), 0126

Bashkir (ba), 0201

Byelorussian (be), 0205

Bulgarian (bg), 0207

Bihari (bh), 0208

Bislama (bi), 0209

Bengali (bn), 0214

Tibetan (bo), 0215

Breton (br), 0218

Catalan (ca), 0301

Corsican (co), 0315

Welsh (cy), 0325

Danish (da), 0401

Bhutani (dz), 0426

Esperanto (eo), 0515

Estonian (et), 0520

Basque (eu), 0521

Persian (fa), 0601

Finnish (fi), 0609

Fiji (fj), 0610

Faroese (fo), 0615

Frisian (fy), 0625

Irish (ga), 0701

Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704

Galician (gl), 0712

Guarani (gn), 0714

Gujarati (gu), 0721

Hausa (ha), 0801

Hindi (hi), 0809

Croatian (hr), 0818

Hungarian (hu), 0821

Armenian (hy), 0825

Interlingua (ia), 0901

Interlingue (ie), 0905

Inupiak (ik), 0911

Indonesian (in), 0914

Icelandic (is), 0919

Hebrew (iw), 0923

Yiddish (ji), 1009

Javanese (jw), 1023

Georgian (ka), 1101

Kazakh (kk), 1111

Greenlandic (kl), 1112

Cambodian (km), 1113

Kannada (kn), 1114

Korean (ko), 1115

Kashmiri (ks), 1119

Kurdish (ku), 1121

Kirghiz (ky), 1125

Latin (la), 1201

Lingala (ln), 1214

Laotian (lo), 1215

Lithuanian (lt), 1220

Latvian (lv), 1222

Malagasy (mg), 1307

Maori (mi), 1309

Macedonian (mk), 1311

Malayalam (ml), 1312

Mongolian (mn), 1314

Moldavian (mo), 1315

Marathi (mr), 1318

Malay (ms), 1319

Maltese (mt), 1320

Burmese (my), 1325

Nauru (na), 1401

Nepali (ne), 1405

Occitan (oc), 1503

Oromo (om), 1513

Oriya (or), 1518

Panjabi (pa), 1601

Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619

Quechua (qu), 1721

Rhaeto-Romance (rm),

1813

Kirundi (rn), 1814

Romanian (ro), 1815

Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823

Sanskrit (sa), 1901

Sindhi (sd), 1904

Sangho (sg), 1907

Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908

Sinhalese (si), 1909

Slovak (sk), 1911

Slovenian (sl), 1912

Samoan (sm), 1913

Shona (sn), 1914

Somali (so), 1915

Albanian (sq), 1917

Serbian (sr), 1918

Siswati (ss), 1919

Sesotho (st), 1920

Sundanese (su), 1921

Swahili (sw), 1923

Tamil (ta), 2001

Telugu (te), 2005

Tajik (tg), 2007

Thai (th), 2008

Tigrinya (ti), 2009

Turkmen (tk), 2011

Tagalog (tl), 2012

Setswana (tn), 2014

Tonga (to), 2015

Turkish (tr), 2018

Tsonga (ts), 2019

Tatar (tt), 2020

Twi (tw), 2023

Ukrainian (uk), 2111

Urdu (ur), 2118

Uzbek (uz), 2126

Vietnamese (vi), 2209

Volapük (vo), 2215

Wolof (wo), 2315

Xhosa (xh), 2408

Yoruba (yo), 2515

Zulu (zu), 2621

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 155 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

Country/Area code list

Country/Area, Country/Area code , Code letter

Argentina, 0118 , ar

Australia, 0121 , au

Austria, 0120 , at

Belgium, 0205 , be

Brazil, 0218 , br

Canada, 0301 , ca

Chile, 0312 , cl

China, 0314 , cn

Denmark, 0411 , dk

Finland, 0609 , fi

France, 0618 , fr

Germany, 0405 , de

Hong Kong, 0811 , hk

India, 0914 , in

Indonesia, 0904 , id

Italy, 0920 , it

Japan, 1016 , jp

Korea, Republic of, 1118 , kr

Malaysia, 1325 , my

Mexico, 1324 , mx

Netherlands, 1412 , nl

New Zealand, 1426 , nz

Norway, 1415 , no

Pakistan, 1611 , pk

Philippines, 1608 , ph

Portugal, 1620 , pt

Russian Federation, 1821 , ru

Singapore, 1907 , sg

Spain, 0519 , es

Sweden, 1905 , se

Switzerland, 0308 , ch

Taiwan, 2023 , tw

Thailand, 2008 , th

United Kingdom, 0702 , gb

USA, 2119 , us

Screen sizes and disc formats

When viewing on a standard TV or monitor

Screen format of disc Setting

16:9 4:3 (Letter Box)

Appearance

The programme is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen.

4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the programme are cropped so that the picture fills the whole screen.

4:3 4:3 (Letter Box)

4:3 (Pan & Scan)

The programme is presented correctly on either setting.

When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor

Screen format of disc Setting

16:9 16:9

Appearance

The programme is presented in widescreen.

4:3 16:9 Your TV will determine how the picture is presented — check the manual that came with the TV for details.

155

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 156 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

Handling discs

When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.

Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the label side of the disc.

Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unusable.

Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a circular motion.

For more detailed care information see the instructions that come with discs.

Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.

Damaged discs

Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder.

If you can see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don’t risk using it; you could end up damaging the recorder.

This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs.

156

If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly.

Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vinyl records.

Storing discs

Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl records, you should still take care to handle and store discs correctly.

When you’re not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight).

Don’t glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc.

Cleaning the pickup lens

The HDD/DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center. Although lens cleaners are commercially available, we do not recommend using them since some may damage the lens.

Condensation

Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on and using.

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 157 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

Hints on installation

We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suitable location for it:

Do...

Use in a well-ventilated room.

Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack.

Don’t...

Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances.

Place on a window sill or other place where the recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight.

Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.

Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use.

Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference — especially if the television uses an indoor antenna.

Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam.

Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth — this may prevent proper cooling of the unit.

Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.

Moving the recorder

If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the

POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or recording

— discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged.

Resetting the recorder

If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory settings.

1 Make sure that the recorder is on.

2 Using the front panel controls, press and hold (Stop) and press STANDBY/

ON.

The recorder turns off with all settings reset.

157

DVRLX60D_WV_EN.book 158 ページ２００７年３月２６日　月曜日　午後１２時１６分

Additional information

Specifications

General

Power requirements . . . . . 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz

Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 W

Power consumption in standby mode . . . . . . . 0.69 W

(Front panel display: off)

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 kg

Dimensions

. . . . . . . . . . . .420 mm (W) x 77 mm (H) x 288 mm (D)

Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C

Operating humidity

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation)

TV system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NTSC (external input only)

/PAL/SECAM

Readable discs

DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW,

DVD-RAM, Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW

(WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA, DivX)

Recording discs and formats

DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode

DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode

DVD-RAM: VR mode

DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode

DVD+R DL: +VR mode

Video recording format

Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MHz

Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG

Audio recording format

Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz

Compression format . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM

(uncompressed)

Recording time

HDD (250 GB)

XP+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36 h

Fine (XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 53 h

Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 106 h

Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 212 h

Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 319 h

Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 425 h

Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 532 h

Manual Mode (MN). . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 36 h to 711 h

158

DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM

Fine (XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h

Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h

Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h

Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h

Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h

Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h

(DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only)

Manual Mode (MN)

DVD-R/-RW/-RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h to 13 h

DVD+R/+RW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h to 8 h

DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL

Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m

Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 3 h 35 m

Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 7 h 11 m

Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h 46 m

Super Long Play (SLP). . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 21 m

Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h 57 m

(DVD-R DL only)

Manual Mode (MN)

DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h

DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m

Timer

Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programmes

Clock . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)

Tuner (analog)

Receivable channels

VHF (low)

VHF (high)

Hyper

UHF

VHF (low)

SECAM B/G

PAL B/G

Frequency Channel

47 MHz to 89 MHz E2 to E4

X to Z

104 MHz to 300 MHz

302 MHz to 470 MHz

470 MHz to 862 MHz

E5 to E12

S1 to S20

M1 to M10

U1 to U10

S21 to S41

E21 to E69

PAL I

Frequency

44 MHz to 89 MHz

104 MHz to 300 MHz

Channel

A to C

X to Z

D to J

11, 13

S1 to S20

302 MHz to 470 MHz

470 MHz to 862 MHz

S21 to S41

E21 to E69

SECAM L

Frequency

49 MHz to 65 MHz

Channel

FB, FC1, FC

SECAM D/K

PAL D/K

Frequency Channel

49 MHz to 94 MHz R1 to R5

VHF (high)

Hyper

UHF

104 MHz to 300 MHz F1 to F6

B to Q

104 MHz to 300 MHz R6 to R12

S1 to S20

300 MHz to 470 MHz

470 MHz to 862 MHz

S21 to S41

21 to 69

302 MHz to 470 MHz

470 MHz to 862 MHz

S21 to S41

E21 to E69

STEREO

B/G - A2

I - NICAM

L - NICAM

B/G - NICAM

D/K - NICAM

Tuner (digital)

Receiving system . . . . . . . . . . DVB-T (2 K/8 K COFDM)

Tuner VHF/UHF

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VHF band III (174 MHz to 230 MHz)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . UHF band IV, V (470 MHz to 862 MHz)

Auto Channel Preset . . . . . . . . . . 999 ch, Auto Preset,

Auto Label, Auto Sort

Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo MPEG layer I/II

Audio Decoder

. . . . . Sampling frequencies: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

This product’s digital tuner has been confirmed for use in the following countries: Belgium, France, Germany,

Italy, Spain, Denmark, Finland, Netherlands, Sweden,

Switzerland, UK.

17 Additional_Information.fm 159 ページ２００７年３月２９日　木曜日　午後９時２１分

Additional information

Input/Output

Antenna

. . . . 75 Ω IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (analog)

. . . . 75 Ω IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (digital)

Video input. . . . . . . . . . . .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front),

Input 3 (rear)

Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω )

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (Input 1),

RCA jack (Input 2, Input 3)

Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output

Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω )

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1),

RCA jack (Output)

S-Video input . . . . . . . . . .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front),

Input 3 (rear)

Y (luminance) - Input level. . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω )

C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω )

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (Input 1),

4 pin mini DIN (Input 2, Input 3)

S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output

Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω )

C (colour) - Output level. . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω )

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1),

4 pin mini DIN (Output)

Component video output

Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω )

, P

: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω )

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks

RGB input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV2 (Input 1)

Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω )

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (Input 1)

RGB output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1

Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω )

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1)

Audio input . . . . . . . . . . .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front),

Input 3 (rear) L/R

During audio input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms

(Input impedance: more than 22 k Ω )

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (Input 1),

RCA jacks (Input 2)

Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output

During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms

(Output impedance: less than 1.5 k Ω )

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1),

RCA jacks (Output)

Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack

Digital audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coaxial

G-LINK™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack

Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA module

DV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin (front)

(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A (front), Type B (front)

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pin

AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)

AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector

This connector provides the video and audio signals for connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.

PIN no.

AV1 (RGB)-TV / AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER)

1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out

2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in

11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in

3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out

6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in

15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in

4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GND

17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GND

7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in

19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out

20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in

8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status

21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .GND

Supplied accessories

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Audio/Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

G-LINK™ cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

RF antenna cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

Operating Instructions

Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice, due to improvement.

This product includes FontAvenue ® fonts licenced by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.

Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

159

00 Cover_back_WV.fm 1 ページ２００７年１月２４日　水曜日　午後４時２分

DVR-LX60D

HDD/DVD RECORDER

http://www.pioneer.co.uk

http://www.pioneer.eu

Published by Pioneer Corporation.

PIONEER CORPORATION

4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.

Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270

Printed in UK

K002_B_En

<VRB1459-A>

Discover the benefits of registering your product online at http://www.pioneer.co.uk

(or http://www.pioneer.eu

)

Operating Instructions

Hello! I am an AI chatbot specifically trained to assist you with the Pioneer DVR-7000 Operating instructions. I have thoroughly reviewed the document and can help you locate the exact information you need or explain the content in clear and simple terms. Whether you’re looking for guidance on specific features, troubleshooting steps, or general usage, feel free to ask your questions. The more details you provide about your concerns or needs, the more accurately and effectively I can assist you!

Assistant typing

Assistant is out of keyboard. Please, try again later.